Hdi-3500 Manual Service

Printed in USA
All rights reserved

Copyright 2000 by ATL Ultrasound
4730-0036-02 Rev A
December 2000
HDI 3500 Service Manual
10/2/00
About This Manual
Audience
This manual supports the field service maintenance and repair of

the HDI 3500 Ultrasound System. The user of this document is a
qualified ultrasound electronics technician who has completed
training classes on the system and its peripherals.
Manual Format
This manual is available in two versions: Portable Document Format (PDF), for viewing on a laptop-computer with Acrobat
Reader, and hard copy. In the PDF version, a list of bookmarks
functions as an additional table of contents, and the bookmarks,
index, table of contents, and cross-references use hypertext links
to provide access to the referenced information.
Conventions
Used in This
Manual
The following conventions are used in this manual:
All procedures are numbered. You must complete steps in the

sequence they are presented to ensure reliable results.
Bulleted lists indicate general information about a function or

procedure. They do not imply a sequential procedure.
Control names are spelled and capitalized in the manual as

they are on the system.
Menu items or titles appearing on the display are spelled and

capitalized in the manual as they are on the display.
Scanheads and pencil or static probes are referred to as

scanheads, unless the distinction is important to the meaning
of the text.
4730-0036-02
Service Manual
Questions
or Comments
Customer
Assistance
Page 2
If you have questions about the service manual, or you discover an error in the manual,email/mail a Manual Change Request or contact ATL Technical Publications:
atl-bothell.techpubs@philips.com
Technical Publications, MS 264, at the address below
Various support locations around the world can provide customers with technical assistance regarding the ultrasound system.
Customers should contact the sales office where they purchased the system or the nearest ATL office. ATL office addresses and telephone numbers are in the system user manual set.
Company
Address
ATL Ultrasound
P.O. Box 3003
Bothell, WA 98041-3003
USA
www.atl.com
ATL, Advanced Technology Laboratories, Cineloop, CHROMA, Color Power Angio, ENTOS, HDI, High Q,
and Power Harmonic are registered trademarks of ATL Ultrasound are trademarks of ATL Ultrasound.
Flash Contrast, High Definition, Power Motion, Tissue Specific, and Weblink are trademarks of ATL Ultrasound.
Non-ATL product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
4730-0036-02
Page 1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-1 HDI 3500 System (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-2 HDI 3500 System (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
23
24
24
24
25
27
28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical and Video Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature, Pressure, and Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physio Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-1 Physio ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-2 Physio High Level ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-3 Physio Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-4 Physio Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-5 Physio Phono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
4730-0036-02
Page 2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
34
34
36
37
38
39
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-1 System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-2 Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-3 ACIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-4 Control Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-5 Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-6 Channel Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-7 Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
40
40
40
41
41
42
43
47
48
49
51
52
54
55
56
4730-0036-02
Page 3
Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-8 Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-9 2D Black and White Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-10 PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-11 CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-12 Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-13 External VCR Playback Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-14 External VCR Record Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Power Monitor Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-15 Power Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
58
59
60
61
61
62
63
64
64
66
68
68
68
71
71
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PreInstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-1System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
72
72
72
73
73
4730-0036-02
Page 4
Table 5-2 System Crate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To verify a dedicated/isolated line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-3 Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Management Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-4 Network Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uncrating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To uncrate the system from a wood crate: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-1 Wooden Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-2 Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-3 Monitor Latch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-4 Corrugate Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-5 Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
74
74
75
76
77
77
78
78
78
78
79
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
83
84
85
85
88
89
4730-0036-02
Page 5
General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To perform a general inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To perform a mechanical inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
90
91
91
91
To perform an electrical inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
VCR Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 5-5 Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120V VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 5-6 VCR Programming Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Printer Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 5-7 Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 5-8 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 5-9 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup . 101
Table 5-10 Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 5-11 Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 5-12 P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 5-13 P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 5-14 Sony UP890 Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 5-15 Aspect Multi-Image Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 5-16 System Setups for Video Printers and Aspect MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Final Inspection and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
System Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4730-0036-02
Page 6
Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NetLink Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Table, Device Table, and Device Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
113
115
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Up and Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-1 Power-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Defaults Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanhead Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Color Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Color Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
118
119
119
119
121
121
121
122
122
123
123
123
124
127
130
131
132
134
4730-0036-02
Page 7
M-mode Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M-mode Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-1 PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steered CW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-2 Steered CW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-3 CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise Band Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-4 Image Management Printer Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-5 ECG Simulator Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplane TEE Scanhead Face Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-6 ISEM Video Source Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-7 ISEM Video Calibration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-8 ISEM Date and Time Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Test Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
135
136
136
139
141
142
142
142
143
143
144
148
148
149
149
151
151
152
152
153
155
157
4730-0036-02
Page 8
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Monitor to the Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To set monitor controls to the factory default settings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Monitor for Optimal Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To access FIMI monitor menus: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7-1 Monitor Control Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
165
166
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Disk Drive Head Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To clean and adjust the trackball tension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8-1 Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
168
168
168
170
170
171
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Core Bootup Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9-1 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9-2 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9-1 Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9-2 PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
172
172
172
174
175
176
179
4730-0036-02
Page 9
Figure 9-3 PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 9-4 ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Alert Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
To remove the alert from the display: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 9-5 Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Table 9-3 User Event Log Language Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 9-6 User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Formatting Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
To format a blank optical disk: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Backing Up Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 9-7 Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Core Dump Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
To use the core dump utilities to backup data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
User Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
To access the user diagnostics: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 9-8 User Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Comprehensive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
To invoke the Comprehensive Test:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Check Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Show Bootup Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Show Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Show Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4730-0036-02
Page 10
Table 9-4 Machine Options/Software Build

Compatibility Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Diags Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To backup the diagnostic data to an optical disk:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Test Patterns Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9-5 Video Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
203
203
204
205
206
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Cage PCBs and Modules
.........................................................
To remove the IIM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To insert the IIM:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To install the monitor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To remove the monitor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To remove the Control Panel PCBs, trackball, or ON/STANDBY switch: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10-1 Control Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal OEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To install an Internal OEM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10-2 OEM Orientation on OEM Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10-3 Internal OEM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To remove the Scanhead Select Module: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To install the Scanhead Select Module: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10-4 S/HSEL Installation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
208
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
211
212
212
212
214
214
214
215
216
4730-0036-02
Page 11
Figure 10-5 Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Figure 10-6 Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
System Cabling and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 11-1 Connector Locations, Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 11-2 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 11-3 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 11-4 AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 11-5 Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 11-6 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 11-1 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 11-7 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Table 11-2 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 11-8 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Table 11-3 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 11-9 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Table 11-4 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 11-10 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX)
. . . . 234
Table 11-5 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input(P/N 2275-0327-XX) . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 11-11 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Table 11-6 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4730-0036-02
Page 12
Figure 11-12 AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 237
Table 11-7 AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 11-13 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Table 11-8 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 11-14 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Table 11-9 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 11-15 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 11-10 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 11-16 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Table 11-11 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 11-17 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 246
Table 11-12 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 11-18 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Table 11-13 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 11-19 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . 250
Table 11-14 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 11-20 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 252
Table 11-15 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 11-21 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table 11-16 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 11-22 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Table 11-17 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 11-23 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4730-0036-02
Page 13
Table 11-18 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 11-24 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-19 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-25 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-20 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-26 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-21 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-27 LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-28 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-22 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-29 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-23 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-30 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-24 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-31 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-25 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-32 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-26 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11-33 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-27 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2
(P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11-28 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2
(P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
259
260
261
261
262
263
264
265
265
266
267
268
268
269
269
273
274
276
277
278
4730-0036-02
Page 14
Table 11-29 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1

(P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 11-34 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table 11-30 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 11-35 Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 11-36 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Table 11-31 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 11-37 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Table 11-32 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 11-38 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Table 11-33 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Monitor Internal Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
System Interconnect Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 11-35 HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
150.XX Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4730-0036-02
Page 15
Features Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features Not Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150.23 (8.5.1 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150.24 (8.5.2 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151.06 (8.5.3 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
300
300
301
302
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Usage Rules for PCB Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Usage Rules for PROM Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Usage Rules for Jumper and PROM Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Table 13-1 System Software Level Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Repairing DDEA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Table 13-2 DDEA Replaceable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Hard Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
To replace a system hard drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
To order pre-loaded hard drives, a drive with the correct options and software version, your order must
include the following information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Table 13-3 Hard Drive Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Drive Jumper and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Table 13-4 Hard Drive Jumper/LED Status1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 13-1 IBM Hard Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Table 13-5 Magneto-Optical Drive Switch/Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 13-2 MO Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4730-0036-02
Page 16
Replacement Code Legend (All Matrices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

PCB Replacement Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Table 13-6 PS1,2,3 Power Supply Module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Table 13-7 A1F Disk Drive ECG Audio PCB (DDEA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Table 13-8 A4F Front End Controller PCB (FEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Table 13-9 A4F FEC PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Table 13-10 A4F FEC PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 13-3 FEC Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Table 13-11 A5F Analog Interface Module PCB (AIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 13-12 A6F Doppler Acquisition PCB (DOPACQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 13-13 A7F - A11F Channel Board PCBs (CB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 13-14 A1B Internal Interface Module PCB (IIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 13-15 A2B Peripheral Interface Module PCB (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 13-16 A3B Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 13-17 A3B PCM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Table 13-18 A3B PCM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 13-4 PCM Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Table 13-19 A4B Pixel Space Processor 2 (PSP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 13-20 A5B Pixel Space Processor 1 (PSP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 13-21 A5B PSP1 PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 13-22 A5B PSP1 PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 13-5 PSP1 Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 13-23 A6B System CPU (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
4730-0036-02
Page 17
Table 13-24 A6B CPU PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 13-25 A6B CPU PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13-6 CPU PROM Locations (3500-2677-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-26 A8B Image Memory PCB (IMEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-27 A9B Adv. Digital, Aud., Physio, &Translator(ADAPTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-28 A9B ADAPTR PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-29 A9B ADAPTR PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13-7 ADAPTR PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-30 A11B Sample Space Processor (SSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-31 A11B SSP PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-32 A11B SSP PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13-8 SSP PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-33 A12B Advanced IF Output Module (AIFOM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-34 A13B AIFOM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-35 A13B AIFOM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13-9 AIFOM PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-36 User Interface Module (UIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-37 PS5 AC Input Module (ACIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-38 Centerplane PCB (CTRBRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-40 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-41 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-39 Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-42 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328
328
329
330
330
331
331
332
333
333
333
334
335
335
335
336
337
337
337
338
338
338
339
4730-0036-02
Page 18
Table 13-43 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 13-44 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-45 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-46 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-47 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-48 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-49 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13-50 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel),
Swedish/Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
339
340
340
340
341
341
342
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
How to Find a Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
How to use the figures and tables in this section: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Parts Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 14-1 HDI 3500 Main Components and Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 14-2 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 14-3 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 14-4 Cable Drape Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 14-5 HDI 3500 System, Front (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 14-6 HDI 3500 System, Front (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 14-7 Front Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 14-8 HDI 3500 System, Rear (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 14-9 HDI 3500 System, Rear (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4730-0036-02
Page 19
Figure 14-10 Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Figure 14-11 24VDC Fans (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 14-12 Caster Assembly, Swivel Type (Front and Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 14-13 Card Cage, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 14-14 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 14-15 DDEA Module Assembly (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 14-16 DDEA Module Assembly (Without MO Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 14-17 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG, MO Drive and Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 14-18 MO Drive (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 14-19 Non MO Drive Connector Bracket (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 14-20 Card Cage, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 14-21 AC Input Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 14-22 Power Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 14-23 OEM Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 14-24 Video Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 14-25 Video Monitor Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 14-26 Video Monitor Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 14-27 Microphone Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 14-28 Monitor Tilt Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 14-29 Monitor Tilt Base Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 14-30 VCR Support (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 14-31 Control Panel (Lock Bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 14-32 Control Panel (Upper and Lower UIF Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4730-0036-02
Page 20
Figure 14-33 Command Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Figure 14-34 Cart Handle (Cart Weldment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 14-35 Cable Clamp Assembly (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 14-36 Hand Controller Connector Bracket (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 14-37 Integrated Stress Echo Module and Accessories (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 14-38 OEM Remote Tray Assembly (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 14-39 Tray Rod Detent (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 14-40 System Labels (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 14-1 HDI 3500 System Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 14-2 HDI 3500 System Accessories Parts List (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Table 14-3 Peripheral Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15-1 Scanhead Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix
.............................................
Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15-4 Scanhead Clinical Options and TSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15-5 PW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
418
418
418
420
422
424
432
4730-0036-02
Page 21
Table 15-6 CW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4730-0036-02
Page 22
General Information: Introduction
General Information
Introduction
The HDI 3500 system is a general-purpose, mobile, software-controlled, diagnostic ultrasound system (Figure 1-1, and Figure 1-2). Its function is to acquire, process, and display ultrasound data.
The operator can measure anatomical structures and generate reports for health care
professionals. The primary users are physicians and sonographers in clinics and hospital
departments that provide diagnostic ultrasound services.
The system has a basic set of imaging modes and measurement tools. There also are
modes and measurement tools that are only available when a specific mode or analysis
package is purchased and enabled for customer use. Upgrade security is controlled
through the use of system-specific passwords and software.
4730-0036-02
Page 23
VCR
Control panels
Upper user interface
Monitor
Lower user interface
Optical disk drive
Peripheral bay
Card cage and

scanhead receptacles
Footswitch
Figure 1-1
HDI 3500 System (Front)
Frame
4730-0036-02
Page 24
1
2
120 v~
3
60 Hz4
1450 VA
5
6
7
ON
OFF
Figure 1-2
HDI 3500 System (Rear)
Applications
Fetal, abdominal, intraoperative, pediatric, small organ, neonatal and adult cephalic,
pediatric and adult cardiac, transesophageal, transrectal, transvaginal, peripheral vascular, peripheral vessel, and laparoscopic.
Scanheads
The following scanhead types are supported:
4730-0036-02
Physical
Description
Phased arrays
Linear arrays
Convex arrays
Compact linear array
Intraoperative
Static TCD probes
Bi-plane and multi-plane transesophageal
Page 25
Frame
The frame provides the primary structural support for the system. It has a one-piece
weldment. Front and rear casters are swivel mounted. Front casters have brake locks. All
casters have integral shock mounts. The frame provides the mounting base and swivel
mechanism for the monitor module.
Card Cage
The removable card cage slides into the frame and is secured with screws. It incorporates a centerplane with modules inserted from the front and rear. Rear mounted fans
provide filtered forced-air cooling.
Ten slots are dedicated with appropriate shielding for beamformer boards. External connections are provided through connectors mounted on brackets attached directly to the
card cage modules to eliminate cabling to remote connectors. All PCBs and other modules in the card cage are slide-in modules with card-edge connectors, switches, and
LEDs, as necessary.
4730-0036-02
Page 26
Peripheral Bay
Peripherals are installed into the cart with their control panels accessible to the operator.
PRINT and RECORD on the system control panel control the peripherals. In addition,
VCR CTRL is used to display the following VCR softkeys: PLAY, PAUSE, STOP, FF, and
REWIND.
The open peripheral bay will accept a variety of peripherals. Peripherals are mounted by
one or more straps on a universal adapter plate. The plate can easily be modified or
replaced to accommodate future peripherals. A VCR mounts on top of the monitor or in
the peripheral bay.
Control Panels
Control panel controls are located on the upper and lower user interface assemblies.
Operator controls consist of a full-size keyboard, a trackball and an array of pushbuttons,
toggle switches, slidepots, and rotary controls. Pressing certain switches displays menus
on the video screen. The trackball is then used to select from the menus. Slidepots control TGC. Rotary controls are used for gain control.
Included on the control module assembly are scanhead holders, storage trays at the
rear, and the handle used to move the system. The keyboard wrist rest also serves as an
ESD ground for the operator.
Monitor
The monitor assembly includes a single 15-inch, 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz non-interlaced monitor, monitor enclosure, and mounting for the VCR. VCR and monitor are removable for
mobile systems. The monitor is mounted on a swivel base that is mounted on the frame.
Video resolution is 512 x 640 pixels in NTSC format and 512 x 768 pixels in PAL format.
4730-0036-02
Page 27
General Information: Safety Requirements
The monitor senses the input video format and will also display interlaced video with horizontal sync frequencies, nominally 15.7 KHz, with vertical sync signal frequencies
between 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Cables
Internal power cables are routed from the AC Input Module (ACIM) through the right rear
of the system (with the observer facing the rear of the system) to the OEM or module
requiring power. Internal signal cables are routed from the Internal Interface Module (IIM)
through the left rear of the system to each OEM or the monitor. No cables are connected
to the Centerplane. Refer to Section 11, Cabling, for more information.
Safety
Requirements
Classification:
-
Class I equipment with Type B, BF, and CF applied parts
Ordinary Equipment
Non-AP/APG
Electromechanical safety standards met:

-
CSA C22.2 No. 601.1, Canadian Standards Association, Medical Electrical Equipment
EN 60601-1, Second Edition, including Amendments 1 and 2, European Norm,

Medical Electrical Equipment
EN 60601-1-2, First Edition, European Norm, Collateral Standard, Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 1157:1992, International Electrotechnical Commission, Requirements for the

declaration of the acoustic output of medical diagnostic ultrasonic equipment
JIS T-1000 Series, Japanese Industrial Standard, Medical Electrical Equipment
4730-0036-02
System
Specifications
Page 28
General Information: System Specifications
UL 2601-1, Underwriters Laboratories, Medical Electrical Equipment
Agency approvals:
-
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Japanese Ministry of Health and Welfare
ISO 9001, EN46001 Quality Assurance Standard; Certificate #FM28256 issued

by the British Standards Institution (BSI) for Quality Systems
CE marked to the European Community Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC per

Annex II, as a Class IIa device, in accordance with Annex IX (BSI Certificate
#0604)
See Section 2, Specifications, and Section 6, Performance Tests for size, weight, and
environmental specifications. Also see Section 15, Scanheads for scanhead frequency
and application specifications.
4730-0036-02
Page 30
Specifications: System Specifications
Specifications
System
Specifications
Physical
Dimensions
Electrical and
Video
Parameters
Width: 72.0 cm (28.35 in)
Height: 157.5 cm (62.0 in) with VCR

142.2 cm (56.0 in) without VCR
122 cm (48.0 in) when monitor is removed for transport
Depth: 110.4 cm (43.45 in)
Weight: 172-200 kg (380-440 lbs), depending on the peripherals installed
Power:
-
100-120 Vac, (V), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
120 Vac, (V), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
230 Vac, (V), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
230 Vac, (V), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
NTSC/PAL video formats
Integral AC line conditioner
Power consumption: 800 W; with optional OEMs, 1150 W
Refer to Table 5-3 for power specifications required during system installations.
4730-0036-02
Temperature,
Pressure, and
Humidity Limits
Physio
Performance
Page 31
Storage and Shipping

-
High: 65 C Low: -35 C
All at 1060 hPa to 303 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0. 3 ATM)
15% to 95% relative humidity
Operating Environment
-
High: 40 C Low: 16 C
All at 1060 hPa to 700 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0. 7 ATM)
15% to 95% relative humidity
3620 BTU/Hr at 1060 W (varies with usage, refer to Table 5-3)
Table 2-1
Physio ECG
Lower Frequency Cut-off

Upper Frequency Cut-off
Nominal Input Amplitude
Minimum Sensitivity
Table 2-2
0.3 Hz 0.03 Hz
> 25 Hz 2.5 Hz
1 mVp-p
5 X 10-3 V
Physio High Level ECG

Gain Range
Minimum Sensitivity
0.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
> 27 Hz 2.7 Hz
21 dB 1 dB
5 X 10-3 V
4730-0036-02
Table 2-3
Page 32
Physio Pulse
Transducer Type
Lower Frequency
Cut-off
Upper Frequency
Cut-off
Gain Range
Minimum Sensitivity
Table 2-4
Other
0.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
> 50 Hz
> 50 Hz
45 dB 1 dB
35.5 dB 1 dB
50 X 10- 6V
2 X 10-3 V
Physio Auxiliary

Gain Range
Minimum Sensitivity
Table 2-5
Fukuda Denshi
0.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
0.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
> 800 Hz
28.5 dB 1 dB
5 X 10-3 V
Physio Phono
Gain Range
Minimum Sensitivity
Fukuda
Denshi
Phono
Filter
Low
Frequency
Cut-off
Upper
Frequency
Cut-off
Fukuda
Denshi
Off
28 2.8 Hz
810 81 Hz
51 1 dB 56 1dB
50 X 10-6V 50 X 10-6 V
Low
78 7.8 Hz
385 38.5 Hz 51 1 dB 56 1dB
15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
620 62 Hz
51 1 dB 56 1dB
15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
180 18 Hz 800 80 Hz
51 1 dB 56 1dB
10 X 10-6V 10 X 10-6 V
Medium 90 9.0 Hz
High
Other
Other
4730-0036-02
Page 33
Specifications: System Installation Specifications
Doppler
Maximum
Measurable
Velocities
(MMV)
Refer to Table 15-5 and Table 15-6. Customers can refer to HDI 3500 Ultrasound System
Scanheads and Safety Manual.
System
Installation
Specifications
System installation specifications include environmental requirements, uncrated and

crated dimensions, and power requirements. Refer to Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3
for these specifications.
4730-0036-02
Page 34
Safety: Safety Information
Safety
Safety
Information
Introduction
Please read this information before using an ATL ultrasound system. It applies to
the ultrasound system, scanheads, recording devices, and any optional equipment.
This device is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of a
licensed physician qualified to direct the use of the device.
In this manual, a WARNING describes precautions necessary to prevent injury or loss of
life.
In this manual, a CAUTION describes precautions necessary to protect the equipment.
Electrical Safety
This equipment has been Certified by a recognized third-party testing agency as a Class
I device with Type B non-isolated and Type BF and Type CF isolated patient-applied
parts. For maximum safety, observe the following warnings and cautions:
4730-0036-02
WARNINGS
Page 35
Before connecting and applying power, all ACIM (power input panel) mounting screws
must be in place and properly secured to complete the system ground path.
Shock hazards may exist if this system is not properly grounded. Protection against
electrical shock is provided by grounding the chassis with a 3-wire cable and plug.
The system must be plugged into a hospital-grade three-hole outlet. The grounding
wire must not be removed or defeated.
Do not remove the protective covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present
inside. Cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjustments and replacements must be made by a qualified ATL Field Service Engineeer.
Do not operate this system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics. Explosion can result.
Always inspect the scanhead or pencil probe face, housing, and cable before use. Do
not use the scanhead or pencil probe if the face is cracked, chipped, or torn, the
housing is damaged, or the cable is abraded.
Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
Connection of optional devices not supplied by ATL could result in electrical shock.
When such optional devices are connected to your ultrasound system, ensure that
the total system chassis risk current does not exceed 300 A for 120 Vac and 500 A
for 230 Vac systems.
In general, only the area of the scanhead acoustic window is watertight. Except
where specified in specific scanhead cleaning instructions, do not immerse the
remainder of a scanhead in any liquid.
4730-0036-02
CAUTIONS
Page 36
Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds
before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY
before placing the switch to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to the initialization
that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating parameters and
turns off power supplies in a sequential order. Review the power subsystem discussion in Section 4, Theory of Operation.
Always verify the power cord voltage label matches the voltage on the device before
plugging in the power cord. On 230 Volt systems VCR power is 230 Volts but the
monitor is 120 Volts. Applying 230 Volts to the monitor will destroy it.
This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static
procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during
handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to
these components. Such damage to components is not covered by ATL warranties.
Mechanical
Safety
WARNING
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can amount to a significant voltage. The following precautions can reduce ESD: anti-static spray on carpets; anti-static spray on linoleum;
anti-static mats; use of a ground wire connection between the system and the patient
table or bed; use of the ESD pads on the system handles and the wrist support of the
system keyboard.
4730-0036-02
WARNINGS
Page 37
Be aware of the casters, especially when moving the system. The system can weigh
200 kg (440 pounds), depending upon configuration, and it could cause injury to you
or others if it rolls over feet or into shins.
ATL recommends pushing the system, instead of pulling it, and to exercise special
caution when going up or down ramps.
Position external hardcopy devices away from the system. Ensure they are secure.
Do not stack them on the system.
During normal operation, the system power transformer (located behind the rear
cover) is hot to the touch. Use care when working near the transformer to avoid being
burned.
Excessive bending or twisting of a scanhead or pencil probe cable may cause failure
or intermittent operation of the system.
Ensure scanhead cables are secure. Use the cable management system to ensure
the scanhead cables are protected from damage.
Do not sterilize a scanhead using gas or heat methods. Never autoclave a scanhead
or expose it to temperatures exceeding 55 C (131 F). These sterilization methods
may permanently damage the scanhead. Only some scanheads can be sterilized. For
information on disinfection and sterilization, see the Using Disinfectants and Gels
manual, part number 4700-0249-XX.
Equipment
Protection
CAUTIONS
4730-0036-02
CAUTIONS
Safety
Symbol
Definitions
Page 38
Safety: Safety Symbol Definitions
Inspect the system power cord and plug on a regular basis. Ensure they are not damaged in any way.
The power supplies continue to operate when the system is in standby. Ensure the
circuit breaker is off before unplugging the system from the wall outlet.
For optimal performance, the ATL ultrasound system should be connected to a 15amp dedicated circuit with an isolated ground.
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols to

classify electrical connections and warn of potential hazards on medical electronic equipment.
These symbols are used on the outside of the system:

Non-isolated patient connection (Type B). Protection against electrical shock
is provided by connection of chassis to the safety ground.
Isolated patient connection (Type BF).
Isolated patient connection for applied parts in direct contact with major
vessels (Type CF).
I and O on the circuit breaker represent ON and OFF.
/
/
On the power switch, represents ON and STANDBY.
4730-0036-02
Page 39
Safety: Safety Tests
This symbol identifies a safety note. Ensure you understand the function of
this control before using it. Refer to the appropriate section in the Reference
Manual for an explanation of the control.
Drip-proof appliance (scanhead, pencil probe, or footswitch). This instrument
may be safely handled in a damp environment.
IPX-1
Water-proof appliance (scanheads only). This instrument may be safely

immersed.
IPX-7
Identifies equipotential ground (located next to ground stud on the rear

panel).
The following symbols are also used on the system:
Identifies high-voltage components operating above 750 Vac (RMS) or 750
Vdc.
Identifies the point where the system safety ground is fastened to the chassis.
Safety Tests
CAUTION
Always use correct electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when any system covers
have been removed. Refer to Section 3 of the General Field Service Manual, P/N
4720-0219-XX.
4730-0036-02
Page 40
Theory of Operation: Introduction
Theory of Operation
Introduction
This section describes the electronics of the system and how the echo data flows
through it. Also included are descriptions of the control architecture and the software
architecture.
Operating
System
The software operating system is supported by X-Windows software. X-Windows is an

industry-standard software system that allows the development of graphical user interfaces, which consist of windows, graphics, and displayed text.
X-Windows is made up of a server and a client. The server resides on the PCM, and the
client resides on the CPU.
Partitioning
The server completely controls all input and output devices
The client communicates with the server using Ethernet, an asynchronous

byte-stream protocol
CPU software controls all ultrasound functions
The electronics of the system can be divided into five basic functional subsystems
(Figure 4-1). Each subsystem contains several modules that perform specific functions
within the subsystem.
4730-0036-02
Page 41
Theory of Operation: Partitioning
System Block
Diagram
Power
Control
All modules
SCIP Bus
Acquisition
Processing
RF Bus
Display
Image Bus
Network
and
Analysis
Figure 4-1
Monitor, VCR,
peripherals
System Block Diagram

The HDI 3500 Subsystems consists of:
Power Subsystem
Control Subsystem
Acquisition Subsystem
Processing Subsystem
Display Subsystem
Network
4730-0036-02
Power
Subsystem
Page 42
The Power Subsystem (Figure 4-2) includes AC Input Module (ACIM) and Power Supply
Module (PSM). The power subsystem is monitored and controlled by a microprocessor in
the Front End Controller PCB (FEC) using the Front End Processor (FEP) bus.
System power is not field-configurable. Four versions of the ACIM provide 120 Vac/ 60
Hz, 100-120 Vac/50 Hz, 230 Vac/50 Hz, and 230 Vac/60 Hz configurations.
The Power Subsystem also includes a shielded line cord, On/Off circuit breaker, an isolation transformer, a linear transformer, resonant filter capacitors, manual ON/STANDBY
switch (on user interface), software-controlled power ON/STANDBY switch (controlled by
CPU), and overload protection in the power supply (watchdog circuitry on FEC).
There are no power supply adjustments. The subsystem converts high-voltage AC into
DC voltages, then buses these DC voltages over the centerplane to the modules that
require them. Status LEDs on the ACIM and PSM are covered in Section 9, Troubleshooting. Refer to Output Power Monitor Theory on page 64 for Output Power Monitor
theory.
The voltages supplied by the PSM are:
+5 Vdc (Vicor module voltage for logic circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
-5.2 Vdc (Used in ASICs on CPU, DDEA, AIFOM, SSP, ADAPTR, PSP1, PDCM, PIM)
6 Vdc (Used in clock and other analog circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
15 Vdc (Used in amplifier and other analog IC circuit on beamformer boards)
12 Vdc (Used for analog circuitry on all PCB

for HD and MO drive voltage)
+12 to +24 Vdc (variable for fans)
115 Vdc (0 to +HV and 0 to -HV for variable pulsers)
s in Centerplane, DDEA uses +12 V
4730-0036-02
Page 43
FEP bus
Power Distribution Group

ACIM (PS4)
AC
power
input
Circuit
breaker
1200 VA
Fuse
Diode
xfmr
250 V/12 A bridge
155 Vac
-5.2 Vdc
On/Standby
12 Vdc
Environ. bus
+12 to +24 Vdc fans (via ACIM)
+HVDC
FEC power failure
OEM
xfmr
OEM relay
(controlled by
on/standby
switch)
PIM
AIM
and
AIFOM
temp
sensors
Power
supply
module
PSM
(PS1)
(PS2)
(PS3)
FEC HV DC OK (pulser enable)

Sys init*
HV EN
3.3V (not currently used)
OEM
OEM
Monitor, 115 V 10%
Temp
Sensor
+5 Vdc
6 Vdc
80 Vdc (SH multiplex circuits)
15 Vdc
15 to -115 Vdc pulser/mux
(0 to + HV)
Figure 4-2
Power Subsystem
Power Subsystem Operation

The Power Subsystem operates in three modes:
Power-Up
Brief initialization period after system circuit breaker is turned on.
STANDBY
4730-0036-02
Page 44
ON/STANDBY switch remains in STANDBY. Power supplies on: no power to card

cage or internal OEMs, system INIT* set low.
CAUTION
HVDC is present on the Centerplane in STANDBY.
ON
ON/STANDBY switch set to ON. All power rails turned on, system initialized, no faults
detected, OEM voltages enabled.
Refer to paragraph Output Power Monitor Theory on page 64 for information about the
watchdog circuits mentioned below.
Power-Up Mode - occurs when the system circuit breaker is turned on. During
power-on:
PSM powers a small +5 V supply (not the Vicor output), which enables ON/STANDBY
circuitry in the PSM.
All Power Subsystem outputs are held disabled.
PSM resets latches to enable the Vicor power supplies.
The system is placed in STANDBY mode.
STANDBY to On Mode - PSM monitors the state of the ON/STANDBY switch on the UIF.
When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON, the following occurs:
+5 V Vicor logic power is applied to card cage, 6 V is applied to clocks.
System INIT* set to high and PCBs begin to initialize.
OEM power is enabled.
All PCBs, including the FEC initialize and other PSM voltages (like 12 V for HD and
MO drive), are applied as needed.
4730-0036-02
Page 45
FEC monitors card cage temperature via thermistor circuitry in the PSM, AIFOM,
PIM, and AIM PCBs. FEC controls PSM output of + 12 V to +24 V to adjust fan velocity and card cage air flow to maintain a safe operating temperature. Fan speed is minimum up to a card cage temperature of 131 F (55 C). At minimum speed the fan
voltage is minimum, or about 12 to 14 V depending on the line voltage applied.
FEC interprets the voltage and current of PSM and responds by updating ACIM
LEDs.
PSM watchdog circuit sends data to FEC regarding HVDC supply voltage.
On to STANDBY Mode - PSM monitors the ON/STANDBY signal from CPU via the SCIP
bus. When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to STANDBY, the system is set to STANDBY
mode as follows:
Contents of static RAM are copied to non-volatile RAM (time, temperature, status).
FEC requests permission to enter STANDBY mode from CPU via SCIP bus and
starts a time-out and shutdown sequence to prevent software lockup.
CPU initiates a wait period and saves active operating parameters to non-volatile
RAM. If CPU does not respond, FEC proceeds with on-standby sequence.
PSM watchdog circuit stops sending data to FEC. If FEC does not respond to PSM
watchdog circuit, PSM shuts down HV supply.
HV supply disabled.
Power removed from internal OEMs.
System INIT* from PSM is set low to reset the system.
Card cage voltages are disabled (fans are off).
4730-0036-02
Page 46
AC Input Module (ACIM) - PS4
Contains an AC input receptacle (Figure 4-3), main power breaker-switch, ground

stud, power connection for OEM cables, card cage connection, and LED display.
-
LEDs provide diagnostic information (see Section 9, Troubleshooting).
Provides AC power interface to transformers and OEMs.
Provides isolated and filtered HVDC squarewave to PSM for system power.
4730-0036-02
Page 47
OEM
Linear
XFMR
CAP
MAIN
XFMR
Reg
I/O
Circuit
Breaker
OEM Control
PSM
+12 Vdc to +24 Vdc
Reg
HVDC
+155 V
Rectifier
PS1
PS2
PS3
Relay
ACIM
PS4
100-120V 50Hz
120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz
230V 60Hz
Monitor
VCR
Figure 4-3
Fans
Printer
ACIM Module
Power Supply Module (PSM) - PS1, PS2, PS3
Provides -5.2 Vdc for ASICs, +5 Vdc logic power, 6 Vdc for clocks and linear circuitry, +3.3 Vdc (not currently used), +12 Vdc to +24 Vdc fan control, 12 Vdc for ana-
4730-0036-02
Page 48
log circuits, +12 V for drives, 15 Vdc for analog circuits), 0 to +HV, and 0 to -HV for
pulser power.
Control
Subsystem
FEC monitors thermistors located on PCBs around the card cage (PSM, AIM, PIM,
and AIFOM). Averages temperature from thermistors and controls voltage to system
fans. (Power supply is disabled in Standby. Fans are not functional.)
Variable HV powers HV pulsers and scanheads with HV multiplexers. Generates

voltages from 15 Vdc to 115 Vdc
Disables all power supplies if HVDC goes below +90 Vdc.
HV watchdog circuit detects if the FEC fails to monitor the HV voltages/currents.

Enables the user to shut down the system if the FEC fails.
HVDC detection circuitry on PSM reports status to the FEC, which notifies the CPU if
it goes below 100 Vdc. CPU stores critical information like custom presets, measurements, calcs, and error data to NV RAM. The diagnostic error log is later updated to
register a loss of HVDC. The CPU uses NV RAM information to update and protect
storage devices against data corruption.
PSM voltage sensing circuits report the ACIM output level of HVDC to the FEC.
PSM diagnostics are performed by the FEC, voltage, current, and system temperature monitoring.
Monitors individual power supplies for over-voltage conditions and shuts down faulty
power supplies.
Contains system standby circuitry.
Enables OEM power.
The Control Subsystem (Figure 4-4) monitors user input, gives status to the user through
UIF, provides system coordination, provides data storage, and service access.
4730-0036-02
User Interface (UIF)
Page 49
IIM PCM
SCSI
Bus
Ethernet
CPU
IMEM
A8B
Image
Bus
Figure 4-4
Control Subsystem
SC Bus
A6B
X2
RS 232
Serial
SCSI
Bus
Hard Drive
Optical Drive
(DDEA)
A1F
Network
Interface
and
Analysis
Acquisition
Subsystem
Processing
Subsystem
Display
Subsystem
Control Subsystem Block Diagram

The Control Subsystem consists of:
System CPU Module (CPU)
Image Memory Module (IMEM)
Disk drives (part of Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio module - DDEA)
System Control bus (SC bus, but often referred to as the SCIP bus) and IIC or I2C bus
(for configuration ID)
Ethernet connectivity and control to PCM
Network Interface and Analysis
4730-0036-02
Page 50
Serial ports for printer and PC remote diagnostics (RS-232)
System CPU (CPU) - A8B (32 MB)
Motorola 68040 microprocessor; VX Works operating system.
Loads modules requiring operating software at boot-up (NVRAM).
Transfers scanhead tables to the FEC as needed.
Generates coefficients and data tables for Processing Subsystem.
Performs analysis calculations.
Queries Power Subsystem for AP&I status.
Ethernet interface control to PCM and external Ethernet port.
X-bus interface to Display Subsystem (PCM).
Time and date.
Stores user setups in (NVRAM).
Verifies major H/W, F/W, S/W revision, upgrade compatibility.
Performs system diagnostics and stores results.
Controls a serial port for a report printer or off-line PC and a serial port used for Laptop remote diagnostics.
Image Memory (IMEM) - A6B
32 MB RAM for data storage (standard)

64 MB RAM (optional, required for DiskLink)
Stores audio data from ADAPTR and frame grab video data from PCM
History buffers for 2D Echo, 2D Color, M-mode Echo, Color M-mode, Scrolling Doppler, Physio, frame grab video, and High Q Analysis
4730-0036-02
Page 51
Stores Cineloop frames.
Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio (DDEA) - A1F
Acquisition
Subsystem
Houses an optional optical drive that formats, reads and writes 128 MB, 230 MB, or
540 MB magneto optical disks.
Houses a hard drive with a disk formatted to the system limit of 2.1 MB and loaded
with system software and optional files unique to each customer and system.
Provides connection for footswitch.
Optional ECG and physio connectors and amplifier circuitry.
The Acquisition Subsystem (Figure 4-5) controls the transducer, generates the electrical
impulse (pulser) that creates the sound wave, and converts the returning echo information into digital data. The beamformer supports 256 digitally beamformed channels.
The Acquisition Subsystem consists of:
Front End Controller Module (FEC)
Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)
Four Bigfoot Channel Boards (CB0 - CB3)
Analog Interface Module (AIM)
Doppler Acquisition Module (DOPACQ) (Installed only on systems with the CW

option)
4730-0036-02
Footswitch
ECG
Page 52
Footswitch
ECG
DDEA A1F
DOP
ACQ
(Pencil)
CW
S/H
SEL
PCM
A3B
ADAPTR
A9B
A6F
CW Sum Bus
Echo Bus (Tx, Rx)
TGC Buses
(Scanheads)
Array
FEC
Array
Pulser
Control
CB0 - CB3
A7F - A10F
RF
Bus
AIFOM
A12B
A4F
TGC
Array
Figure 4-5
AIM
A5F
Acquisition Subsystem
Front End Controller (FEC) - A4F

The FEC downloads operational parameters from CPU and provides real-time control of
the front end for transmit, receive, and beamforming functions.
Interfaces with CPU via SCIP bus to determine scanning sequence and mode of
operation.
4730-0036-02
Page 53
Provides timing signals for Tx and Rx cycle.
Controls scanhead selection, personality, and HV Mux through the AIM and Scanhead Select module.
Sends scanhead operating parameters to CBs through FEC bus.
Receives scanning sequence instructions from CPU and generates digital TGC, PRI
and other timing sequencing.
Bus Interfaces: SCSI, FEP, Clock, SHC, digital TGC, RF, TTag, FEC, SC, and SCAN
(see paragraph Bus Functions on page 68).
Via the FEP bus, the FEC monitors pulser current via the PSM and pulser voltage via
AIM. FEC compares current and voltage values to AP&I values in RAM for error
reporting and to put the system into freeze mode for patient safety.
Channel Boards (CB) A7F - A10F
Channel Board RAM is loaded with operational parameters for selected scanhead
and TSI. Parameters define Tx and Rx beamforming behavior for each scan line and
depth. Transfers data under FEC control for each new PRI. Channel Boards are illustrated in Figure 4-6.
Transmit apodization/power control under FEC control.
Power monitor circuitry, together with the AIM, FEC, and PSM.
Transmits to, and receives from transducer elements under FEC control.
Digitizes RF echo signals, beamforms, adds TGC, and sends digital Rx data to Processing Subsystem over the RF Bus for all modes.
Anti-aliasing filtering.
Supports 256 digital beamform channels.
4730-0036-02
Page 54
Bus Interfaces: Summing, TGC, RF, Clocks, Timing, FEC, FEP
A7F - A10F
Summing Bus
CB0
CB1
32
CB2
32
S/H
SEL
128
32 Rx
32
Mux
Figure 4-6
CB3
32 Tx
Clock Bus
Timing Bus
TGC Bus
FEC Bus
SCIP Bus
32
Pulsers
PSM
HV
Digital
Beamformer
RF
Bus
128 Pulser
Regulators
CB
RAM
Pulser
Monitor
FEP Bus
Bus
Interfaces
AIM
Channel Boards
Analog Interface Module (AIM) - A5F
Generates two-stage TGC control signal
D/A conversion of TGC
Relay control for desired scanhead on S/HSEL
A
I
F
O
M
4730-0036-02
Page 55
All front end and system clocks (240 MHz system oscillator)
Scanhead temperature sensing to FEC via FEP
Sends S/HSEL status and personality data to FEC via FEP bus
Buffers and provides HV Mux selection data to the scanhead
Supplies high voltage to HV Muxes on S/HSEL
Doppler Acquisition (DOPACQ) - A6F
Tx/Rx Doppler for static CW and static PW (TCD)
Intermediate Frequency Rx for steered CW Doppler
Digitizes Doppler to AIFOM
Processes I/Q for static and steered CW Doppler (I/Q reference is from AIM PCB)
Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)
Processing
Subsystem
Connection and mux for transducer elements and the channel boards for array transducer
Provides connection and interface for static CW and TCD transducers to DOPACQ
The Processing Subsystem (Figure 4-7) filters and transforms echo information into digital signal components of each modality, and stores the data as raw image video with
header information for each scan line.
4730-0036-02
Page 56
RF Bus
Acquisition
Subsystem
Image Bus
AQ Bus
AIFOM
A12B
Image
Memory
ADAPTR
A9B
SSP
A11B
ECG
DDEA
PDBus
Audio
Microphone
IIM
Ext. Audio
Figure 4-7
IIM
Speakers
VCR
Processing Subsystem
Advanced Intermediate Frequency Output Module (AIFOM) - A12B
Synthetic aperture
Converts RF data into quadrature (I and Q) data for beamformer data in PW and
Color Doppler modes
Demodulates received RF digitized waveform to either amplitude- or phase-shifted

data in 2D modes
Dynamic Range
4730-0036-02
Page 57
Sample Space Processor (SSP) - A11B
Processes Color Flow, Spectral Doppler, and M-mode data
Persistence
Smoothing
FFT
High Q Automatic Doppler Analysis calculations
Color Doppler filtering
Advanced Digital Audio, Physio, and Translator Module (ADAPTR) A9B
Display
Subsystem
Triggers acquisition from front end based on SC bus command and local timer
Audio to speakers and VCR
Processes microphone and VCR audio; A/D conversion, gain and filtering
Provides D/A audio reproduction for audio sources
The Display Subsystem (Figure 4-8) formats the echo information for display (scan conversion), and transfers it to the video monitor and peripheral devices.
The Display Subsystem consists of:
Upper and Lower User Interface Modules
Pixel Space Processor 1 (PSP1-master) and Pixel Space Processor 2 (PSP2-slave)
Pixel Conversion Module (PCM)
Peripheral Interface Module (PIM)
Internal Interface Module (IIM)
4730-0036-02
Page 58
User Interface Assemblies
Upper and lower User Interface Assemblies.
Controlled by PIM.
UIF is extended with monitor displayed controls using a windows style format.
NOTE
System diagnostics includes the UIF as part of the Display Subsystem.
Internal
Monitor/
Lower
UIF
Upper
UIF
ISEM
Ethernet
PIM
CPU
PCM
UIF
Control
Video
Sync
Control
Processing
Subsystem,
Image
Memory
A3B
UIF
Internal
VCR
Microphone
Speakers
A1B
External
Hardcopy
External
Monitor
PSP
Image
Bus
Figure 4-8
IIM
Internal
Hardcopy
A4B, A5B
Display Subsystem
External
VCR
A2B
4730-0036-02
Page 59
Theory of Operation: Data Paths
Pixel Space Processor (PSP1 & 2) - A5B, A4B
Scan conversion
Zoom
Static and scrolling graphics
Freeze (buffer memory located on PSP1)
Master/slave relationship (PSP1/PSP2)
Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) - A3B
Controls UIF window displays (X-windows)
Gray scale and color LUTs
Converts non-interlaced 60/50 Hz to interlaced 30/25 Hz for OEMs
Gray and color bar generator
Peripheral Interface Module (PIM) - A2B
Encode/decode NTSC and PAL composite Y/C video
System video sync (video clock)
Controls Internal OEMs through IIM
Upper and Lower UIF control processor
Internal Interconnect Module (IIM) - A1B
Data Paths
Audio buffers for internal OEMs
Interconnections between system and UIF, monitor, and devices
Data path block diagrams show the echo signal processing path from echo reception
through video display. The data paths in the illustrations are shown by thick dashed lines
4730-0036-02
Page 60
(Figure 4-9 through Figure 4-14). Solid thin lines indicate that a connection exists but is
not used for that data path.
IMAGE
MEM
DDEA
S/H
Sel
Array
S/H
DOP
ACQ
CH BD
FEC
PCM
AIFOM
ADAPTR
SSP
PSP
AIM
Figure 4-9
PIM
2D Black and White Signal Path
Audio
IIM
4730-0036-02
Page 61
DDEA
S/H
Sel
DOP
ACQ
PCM
AIFOM
CH BD
FEC
Array
S/H
IMEM
Ext.
Audio
ADAPTR
SSP
Figure 4-10
PIM
IIM
Audio
PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path
DDEA
S/H
Sel
IMEM
Ext.
Audio
CW
(Pencil
Probe)
IIM
PSP
AIM
PIM
DOP
ACQ
AIFOM
CH BD
PCM
ADAPTR
FEC
AIM
Figure 4-11
SSP
PSP
2
Audio
CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path
4730-0036-02
Page 62
IMEM
Frame Grab
Playback
Frame
Grab
Data
Internal
VCR
External
VCR
Figure 4-12
A/D
IIM
PIM
Audio
Live
Video
Analog
PSP
PIM
D\A
PCM
Live Video
ADAPTR
IIM
Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path
4730-0036-02
External
VCR
Page 63
Live Video
PIM
IIM
Audio
ADAPTR
These connections are located on rear of the system.
Figure 4-13
External VCR Playback Signal Path
4730-0036-02
PCM
PIM
Page 64
Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
Video
External
VCR
Image Bus
*
Audio
ADAPTR
These connections are located on the rear of the system.
Figure 4-14
External VCR Record Signal Path
Output Power
Monitor
Theory
Output power monitor (Figure 4-15) provides patient safety by ensuring the system is
operating within acoustical power and intensity (AP&I) limits. It also protects hardware
from destructive or unsafe conditions. Power monitoring consists of AP&I software
loaded into RAM; PSM current monitor circuitry; AIM voltage monitor circuitry; FEC tracking of HV current and pulser voltage; FEC reporting to the CPU; and the CPU acting on
any errors.
4730-0036-02
Page 65
The output power monitor is designed to detect any single failure in the system, for
example, a faulty power supply, a faulty beamformer component, a software failure, a
defective scanhead or scanhead data file. Mode information (such as, PRI, voltage,
burst, and so forth.) sent to the beamformer is also verified before allowing the beamformer to start. This prevents the system from inadvertently creating a temporary
over-power condition.
4730-0036-02
Page 66
API Monitor
Pulser
Voltage*
PSM
AIM
Regulator
Pulser
current sense
(HV Out)
HV
Channel Boards
Waveform
generator
Power
AMP
AIM
HV sense
Transducer
CPU
SC bus
FEC
API software
from Hard Drive
SCSI bus
* Actual Pulser voltage is determined by user selections but its source is the + 80V from the PSM.
Figure 4-15
Power Monitor Block Diagram

Both software and hardware watchdogs disable the transmit function when errors are
detected. Software watchdogs monitor variable parameters (for example, AP&Is vary
from scanhead to scanhead). When the software watchdog in the system CPU receives
an error report from a power monitor, it disables the system from transmitting. Hardware
4730-0036-02
Page 67
watchdog circuits disable or shut down the system when maximum, and in some cases
minimum, parameters are exceeded (for example, minimum power supply output voltage
or minimum current limits).
The CPU uses the AP&I software program and system control settings to calculate the
required power output for the selected transducer and operating modality. These values
are sent to the FEC to control generation of pulsers for the beamformer. Voltage and current monitors compare the measured pulser control values with the allowable limits listed
in the AP&I software tables.
NOTE
Software AP&I tables contain power maximums for each transducer in its
allowed operating modes. This data is included in the system reference manual.
The power monitor also provides system and hardware protection through hardware
watchdog circuitry for maximum voltage, maximum pulser currents and output electrical
power. When measured parameters exceed allowable values, the power monitor circuitry
disables the supply and signals the error to the system CPU.
The beamformer monitors the average pulser voltage supplied to the beamformer, pulser
output voltage, and average current. If the monitored values exceed the maximums for
voltage and pulser currents, maximum pulser output electrical power and maximum
pulser power dissipation, the beamformer software watchdog disables the beamformer
and signals the system controller.
Time-outs in the system software verify that the system software can communicate with
the FEC and the Power Subsystem. If either subsystem is not active and functioning, the
system stops the beamformer and shuts down the pulser supply. Time-outs are initiated
at regular intervals and acknowledged by the affected circuits, if operating properly.
Time-out alerts usually are reset if mode, power, or some other function is changed.
4730-0036-02
Page 68
Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
Bus
Functions
Control
Subsystem
Buses
System Control Bus (SC or SCIP bus)

The System Control bus is the main communication network between the CPU and other
modules. Each PCB on the bus houses a PROM called a Serial Control Interface Processor (SCIP), which is used to interface between the bus and each PCB. This bus is often
referred to verbally and in documentation as the SCIP bus, and less often as the Control bus, C bus, or the SC bus. All of these names mean the bus that the CPU uses
to control the system.
Relieves Module Operation Processor (MOP) in servicing control bus activity
Master-slave multi-drop communication network
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
Acquisition
Subsystem
Buses
Interfaces optical and hard disk drives to CPU and FEC
Provides an external port for future use
FEC Bus
Provides operational parameters and controls use of them by CBs
Timing Bus
Carries real-time control signals to CBs, AIM, and DOPACQ
Carefully controlled to ensure sync with front end clocks
Start and stop Tx/Rx cycle
Controls output of the front end ultrasound data on SUM and RF buses
4730-0036-02
Page 69
Power Supply Sync Bus

Transfers real-time high-voltage power supply status between FEC and PSM to sync
starting, stopping, and power level changes in the system
SUM Bus
A cascaded bus that links a summing ASIC to another summing ASIC across Channel
Boards. Using this bus, specially designed ASICs sum multiple echo streams from each
scan line to the data stream from another ASICs data summation. It results in a higher
quality echo bit stream representing the echo from each scan line.
S/H Control Bus

Unidirectional bus between scanhead control sequencer on FEC (master) and AIM for
SH control.
RF Bus
Carries filtered digital echo data from the front end to the AIFOM for processing.
Digital TGC Bus
Carries current digital value of TGC curves and digital values for pulser voltage regulators.
AIM receives digital TGC values from FEC for D-to-A conversion to analog TGC voltages applied to the CBs via the Analog TGC Bus.
AIM receives digital pulser values for D-to-A conversion to a high-voltage analog DC
value for each channel.
4730-0036-02
Page 70
Analog TGC Bus

Two differential analog buses on S/HSEL driven by AIM and received by all CBs for two
variable gain stages.
CW Sum Bus
Differential current bus on the S/HSEL driven by CBs.
AIM receives and processes current representation value of beamformed CW data.
FEP Bus
Extension of CPU bus on FEC bus used for nonreal-time tasks such as output power
monitoring and scanhead interface control.
Time Tag Bus

Used by digital signal processing modules for time tag data. FEC generates time tag signals. The FEP bus is an extension of the FEC's CPU bus. It is used for nonreal-time
tasks such as output power monitoring and scanhead interface control.
SCAN Bus
Used by the SH Control Sequencer in the FEC to load Mux Relay instructions into the SH
Array Buffer on the AIM PCB.
Clock Bus
The main system clock on the AIM PCB uses this bus to synchronize clocks on other
PCBs.
4730-0036-02
Page 71
SCSI Bus
Used in the Control Subsystem and Acquisition subsystems to reduce loading time of
large beamformer files. Acquisition control files are sent directly from the system hard
disk to the FEC over this bus rather than over the SCIP bus .
Processing
Buses
RF Bus
Same as RF Bus on page 69 in the Acquisition Subsystem. The RF Bus is used by the
AIFOM to receive data and pass I&Q information back to the beamformer and FEC.
AQ
Passes AIFOM processed 2D data to the ADAPTR for translation processing. Passes
Doppler, M-mode, and Color data to SSP for processing.
PD
Passes processed Doppler, Color, and M-mode data from SSP to ADAPTR.
Image
Passes image data from ADAPTR, stripped of audio data, to PSP1.
Display Buses
Image
Same as in Processing Subsystem but also passes digitized VCR video data from PCM
to IMEM and ADAPTR for audio processing.
Video
Passes RGB data from PSP to PCM and between PCM and PIM.
4730-0036-02
Page 72
Installation: Pre- Installation
Installation
PreInstallation
Introduction
The purpose of the pre-installation on-site evaluation (pre-site) is to ensure a trouble-free

installation and to assist the customer in providing an environment that supports the reliable performance of an ATL ultrasound system. These instructions are intended to guide
you through a comprehensive inspection that ensures all physical, electrical, and environmental conditions are appropriate for optimal system operation.
Refer to the system specifications in Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 when evaluating
the site.
Required
Materials
Tool Kit and Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
ONEAC Line Viewer (order from ATL service support 1 week prior to site visit)
Oscilloscope
Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)
ATL General Service Manual (4720-0219-XX)
Power Line Data Sticker (4765-0247-XX)
4730-0036-02
Environmental
Requirements
Table 5-1
Page 73
Verify the system is to be operated in a room that meets the environmental requirements
listed in Table 5-1.
System Specifications
Parameter
Metric Value
U.S. Value
Height (without VCR)1

Width
Depth
142.2 cm
56.0 in
72.0 cm
110.4 cm
200 kg
28.35 in
43.45 in
440 lbs
Ambient Operational Temperature2
295 kg
16 to 40 C
650 lbs
61 to 104 F
Internal Operational Temperature2
16 to 55 C
61 to 131 F
Internal Operational Humidity
15 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
-35 to 65 C
-31 to 149 F
Weight with Peripherals1

Fully Crated Shipping Weight (VCR separate)
Storage Temperature3
Storage Humidity
Heat Output4
15 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
3620 BTU/Hr at 1060 W
1. Height with VCR is 157.5 cm (62.0 in); height with monitor removed is 122.0 cm (48 inches); weight without monitor or
peripherals is 172 kg (380 lbs).
2. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 709 hPa (1.0 to 0.7 Atm).
3. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 303 hPa (1.0 to 0.3 Atm).
4. Heat output at current draw listed in Table 5-3. Peripherals will increase heat load. Discuss with the facilities engineer
the possible requirement for additional air circulation to handle the heat load from the system.
4730-0036-02
Page 74
Table 5-2
System Crate Dimensions
Dimensions
Wood Crate
Corrugate Crate
Height
Width
Depth
61 in / 155 cm
39 in / 99 cm
49 in / 114 cm
61 in / 155 cm
38 in / 96.5 cm
48 in / 109 cm
Electrical Power
Requirements
WARNING
For safety and liability reasons, do not disassemble any power outlet or open any electrical panel. Have the facility representative confirm wiring compliance with the criteria
specified below.
To verify a dedicated/isolated line:
1. Explain to the facilities representative that for reliability a dedicated/isolated line meeting the power requirements listed in Table 5-3 is important.
2. Inform the facility representative of the current draw of the system and its acceptable
voltage range. It is the responsibility of the facility representative to determine the
proper size of the wire based upon the length of the feed.
3. Determine the location of the electrical outlet to be used by the system.
4. Verify the proper wiring of the outlet using a three-wire test plug. This plug also tests
for the presence of a ground, but it cannot detect neutral/ground reversals.
5. Measure the hot/neutral, hot/ground, and neutral/ground voltages with no load.
6. Determine line loss:
4730-0036-02
Page 75
a. Measure the voltage at the outlet with the load on (system connected and powered up).
b. Calculate the percentage of voltage loss across the line using the formula:
Percent line loss = [(A - B)/A] x 100
c. A is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system disconnected and B is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system on.
7. Use an ONEAC line viewer to measure power-line noise, following the procedures
provided with the ONEAC. [Section 3, Power, General Service Manual
(4720-0219-XX)]. Repeat with a load applied.
8. Record your power quality observations and measurements on the forms supplied
with the ONEAC.
9. Affix a Power Line Data sticker to the most qualified outlet in each of the primary
operating areas. Add the circuit breaker number and location.
10. Inform the facilities representative of your measurement results and advise on any
corrective actions needed.
Table 5-3
Power Specifications
120 Vac, 50 Hz
120 Vac, 60 Hz
230 Vac, 50 Hz
230 Vac, 60 Hz
Current Draw (normal / peak)1
90 - 110 Vac
8.0 / 10.9 A
96-132 Vac
6.7 / 8.9 A
184-253 Vac
3.4 / 4.7 A
Power Draw (normal / peak)1
800 / 1075 VA
800 / 1075 VA
800 / 1075 VA
775 / 1060 W
775 / 1060 VA
775 / 1060 W
Measurement (system only)

Hot/Neutral
100 Vac, 50 Hz
4730-0036-02
Table 5-3
Page 76
Power Specifications (Continued)
Measurement (system only)

Power Dissipation2 (Maximum/Intermittent)
Neutral-to-Ground
Line Loss
Distortion
Common Mode Noise
Normal Mode Noise
100 Vac, 50 Hz
120 Vac, 50 Hz
120 Vac, 60 Hz
230 Vac, 50 Hz
230 Vac, 60 Hz
1060/1300 W
< 3 Vac RMS
< 3%
< 20%
< 1.5 Vp-p
< 10 Vp-p
1. Current draw and power draw specifications are for the rated voltage ranges. (The normal specification includes system operation without OEMs. The peak specification includes system multimodal operation with OEMs.)
2. Peripherals will increase energy demand. The maximum specification includes the system and OEMs during continuous operation. The intermittent specification includes the system and OEMs during an intermittent duty cycle, such as
a print cycle lasting a minute or less.
Electrostatic
Discharge
During normal system operation, the presence of electrostatic discharge (ESD) can
cause system lock-ups and reliability problems.
CAUTION
With system covers or shields removed, ESD will always cause component damage.
ESD damage is cumulative and may not be apparent at first, as indicated by a hard failure, but can cause degraded performance. Therefore, always use proper ESD handling
procedures.
ESD can result from low humidity, carpeting, linen, and clothing. Avoid placing the system directly under or close to HVAC vents. While special equipment is required to measure ESD levels, you can determine the presence of ESD during the following steps:
4730-0036-02
Page 77
1. Check for the presence of ESD by walking around where the system will be installed
and touching grounded surfaces.
2. Ask the operators if they have experienced static discharge in the work area.
3. Suggest possible ESD minimizing devices and their usage, for example, static mats,
humidifiers, and sprays.
Some facts about ESD:
Electromagnetic
and Radio
Frequency
Interference
ESD voltages in excess of 2,000 V cause a shock.
ESD is audible above 5,000 V.
ESD is visible above 10,000 V.
Voltages as low as 40 V can damage semiconductor devices.
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) typically

cause image noise. EMI and RFI can be generated by a variety of electrical devices and
may not be apparent until installation. The interference can be transmitted over power
lines or radiated through the air.
1. Use an AM radio tuned between stations around 1600 KHz as an EMI/RFI tester
while walking around the room.
2. Note any obvious or potential noise generators. Typical generating devices include
(but are not limited to) gel warmers, coffee pots, air conditioners, fans, photocopiers,
computers, printers, electric typewriters, lab equipment, surgical equipment, MRI
units, elevators, radios, light dimmers, and refrigerators.
Dust
Air circulation requirements of the system and the location of its air filter can cause dust
to accumulate rapidly on the air filter and cause the system to overheat. Advise the customer about the need to maintain a low level of dust in the room.
4730-0036-02
Page 78
Refer to Section 8, Preventive Maintenance, for the fan filter cleaning procedure.
Lighting
Ambient light can interfere with the viewing of video monitors. A darkened room is preferred. Note if there are shades or blinds, small lamps or dimmer switches in the room,
which can be used to control ambient light.
System
Specifications
Wiring Requirements
Image
Management
Network
Requirements
The ATL technician is responsible for configuring the HDI system based on the information received from the sites network administrator. If in-wall cabling is used, it is the customer's responsibility to install the correct type of cable in accordance with all applicable
network requirements and local building and fire codes. It is also the customer's responsibility to maintain the in-wall cabling for the life of the system. The most common type of
cable used is 10 Base-T (unshielded twisted pair). Refer to Table 5-4 to identify what type
of network cable is installed.
The electrical feed to the system shall be a dedicated/isolated line (no other equipment
on the same line) with a third-wire ground. The ground wire shall be an insulated, isolated solid copper conductor bonded to the ground bus of the service panel. The outlet
shall be a Hospital Grade Receptacle (for installations in North America) or an Isolated
Ground Receptacle (International). Proper installation shall reflect compliance with the
national electrical code.
Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option:

1. Identify the system administrator (and backup person, if possible).
2. Obtain the following information from the system administrator:
-
A list of all equipment that is part of the Image Management network
Logical diagram of the network showing topology, subnets, and so forth.
4730-0036-02
Page 79
Diagram of the network relative to ATL systems
Locations of equipment communicating with the installation
Locations of all LAN attachment points related to the installation
Locations of power outlets and connector types
Locations of any dedicated analog phone lines for UpLink modem connection
All necessary Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and subnet information, including
application entity titles for all network devices, subnet masks, aliases, and model
IDs
3. Verify the network cabling has been properly installed:

a. Determine the type of cabling installed (Table 5-4).
b. If 10 Base 2 cabling has been installed, verify that it has been terminated on each
end with a 50 ohm terminator. Intermittent problems and reduced performance are
the usual symptoms of missing terminators, mismatched cabling, or the addition
of cable without regard to configuration. Full network crashes can also occur.
c. Use the network layout diagram to determine the location of all LAN attachment
points.
Table 5-4
Network Cable Types
Cable Type
Cable Identifier
Cable Terminator
10 Base 2
BNC connectors on
wall plate
Modular phone type
connectors on the
wall plate
50 ohm terminator on both

cable ends
No terminator required
10 Base T
4730-0036-02
Page 80
Installation: System Installation
4. Identify OEM equipment installers and contact them regarding the installation.
5. Call ATL to check device compatibility prior to connecting new devices (printers,
archive devices) to the network that are not on the approved compatibility list.
6. Proceed to NetLink Installation on page 114 to install NetLink.
System
Installation
Introduction
This section contains inspection and installation procedures.

NOTE
Some parts of this section include policies, equipment requirements, and procedures that may apply only to U.S. field use. Distributors, affiliates, or other authorized service personnel should use their equivalent document.
Before the system is delivered, perform a site inspection as described in this section.
After you have completed the inspection and installation of the system, verify correct
operation using the performance tests in Section 6, Performance Tests.
Materials and
Equipment
Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)
FSE Tool Kit
ONEAC Line Viewer (order from ATL service support one week prior to site visit)
Oscilloscope
DVM (digital volt meter)
Pre-installation and Installation FSRs
Quality Assurance Audit (PM) label (4100-0941-XX) and label overlay

(4100-0941-XX)
Locate customers manuals for external peripheral devices, if any
4730-0036-02
Preliminary
Inspection
Page 81
Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system.

1. Examine the shipping crate for damage caused by rough handling. Look for evidence
that the crate was opened.
2. Verify the Shockwatch and Tiltwatch indicators on the outside of the crate have not
been activated. If the indicators appear red in color, check the system for further damage.
3. Report any damage or pilferage to the carrier and to the ATL traffic department.
Uncrating
Instructions
Wood Crate
CAUTION
Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear
for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled OPEN THIS END.)
To uncrate the system from a wood crate:
1. Remove the four bolts securing the top and remove the top (Figure 5-1 and
Figure 5-2).
2. Remove the six bolts securing the ramp (the crate front).
3. Lower the hinged ramp.
4. Remove the front and side cardboard/foam panels.
5. Remove the front caster chock.
6. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the
left side of the UIF panel.
7. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched:
4730-0036-02
Page 82
a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the
monitor will not raise.
b. Repeat step a on the opposite side of the monitor.
c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor
from the system.
d. Re-install the monitor ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both
latches.
e. Repeat steps a and b to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to
Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions.
CAUTION
It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking
prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct
latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure.
WARNING
Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage
can result if the system becomes out of control.
8. Verify the caster brakes are released and roll the system down the ramp.
9. Knock the wood crate down flat and return to ATL.
4730-0036-02
Page 83
Back Panel Bolts
(6 Plcs)
Back Panel
Side Panel
Front
Chock
Top
Top
Bolts
(4 Plcs)
1
Pallet
Side
Panel
Bolts
(4 Plcs)
Side
Panel
Top Pad
Ramp
Ramp Bolts
(6 Plcs)
Figure 5-1
Wooden Crate Details
All bolts are secured with

a flat washer and a wing nut.
4730-0036-02
Page 84
Top
(1) Remove ramp bolts.

and the top bolts.
(2) Lift top off

the crate and
lower the ramp.
(3) Remove front chock

.(4) Roll out the system.
Ramp
Front
chock
Figure 5-2
Unpacking Details
4730-0036-02
Locked
Figure 5-3
Page 85
Unlocked
Monitor Latch Positions
Corrugate Crate
CAUTION
Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear
for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled OPEN THIS END.)
To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate:
1. Inspect the tilt and shock indicators on the outside of the crate. If the indicators show
red, inspect and test the system to determine if it was damaged during shipment.
WARNING
Use caution when removing the strapping bands securing the shipping container. These
bands are under enough tension to cause injury if removed carelessly.
2. Remove (cut) the two plastic strapping bands from around the corrugate container
(Figure 5-4).
4730-0036-02
Page 86
3. Remove the top cover from the corrugate crate.

4. Remove any accessories placed on the corrugate tray in front of the monitor
(Figure 5-5).
5. Cut the taped edges of the container and remove the two-piece corrugate box from
around the system.
6. Remove accessories and other loose-packed items not removed in step 4.
7. Remove the two 9/16-in bolts securing the front section of the inner crate to the pallet.
This piece also serves as a ramp.
8. Position the tall end of the ramp so that it butts up against the pallet at the front of the
system with the beveled end of the ramp sloping to the floor.
WARNING
Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage
can result if the system becomes out of control.
9. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the
left side of the UIF panel.
10. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched:
a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the
monitor will not raise.
b. Repeat step a on the opposite side of the monitor.
c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor
from the system.
d. Re-install the monitor, ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both
latches.
4730-0036-02
Page 87
e. Repeat steps a and b to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to

Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions.
CAUTION
It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking
prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct
latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure.
11. Carefully pull the system off of the pallet and down the ramp.
12. Properly dispose of the shipping materials. Do not return these materials to ATL.
4730-0036-02
Page 88
Corrugate lid
Plastic strapping
Corrugate carton
(2 halves)
Bolts (2 plcs)
Ramp
Figure 5-4
Corrugate Crate Details
Pallet
4730-0036-02
Corrugate carton
Accessory tray
(corrugate)
Page 89
Monitor blocks (foam)
Side accordion braces (foam)
Handle
blocks
(foam)
Figure 5-5
Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details
4730-0036-02
Page 90
General
Inspection
WARNING
Dangerous voltages are present inside the system. Do not connect the system to AC line
voltage until correct line voltage has been verified and a thorough inspection of the system has been performed.
To perform a general inspection:
1. Inventory the shipment against the packing list.
2. Inspect the video monitor for damage.
3. Mount the monitor on the system (Monitor on page 207).
4. Connect power and signal cables to the monitor. Verify that the shorter power cord,
labeled 120 Volts and MONITOR is connected to the monitor.
CAUTION
The VCR power cord can be connected to the monitor by mistake. On 230 Volt systems,
this will apply 230 Volts to the 120 Volt monitor, which will damage the monitor.
5. Verify the monitor swivels correctly on its base from left to right and up and down.
6. Inspect the outside surfaces of the system for damage.
7. Verify the system rolls and turns smoothly on its casters.
8. Remove the front, rear, and right side covers.
9. Verify the hardcopy device is undamaged and firmly fastened to the system.
10. Inspect the VCR and mount it securely on top of the monitor.
11. Remove any loose packing material, dust, or debris from the interior of the system.
4730-0036-02
Page 91
Mechanical
Inspection
CAUTION
Take care not to damage cables connected to modules or peripherals.

To perform a mechanical inspection:
1. Verify all modules are secure.
2. Inspect the remaining fasteners.
3. Seat and tighten modules and connectors as necessary.
Electrical
Inspection
The electrical inspection may require reference to the power distribution wiring and
cabling diagrams (see Section 11, Cabling); Section 14, Parts, which contains information on PCB locations and part numbers; Section 13, Configuration, which contains
current information on module; and PROM replacement revision levels.
NOTE
Perform the electrical inspection only if problems are encountered during power
up or if there is evidence of shipping damage.
To perform an electrical inspection:

1. Remove the rear cover from the system.
2. Verify the VCR and hardcopy device power cords are plugged into the ACIM.
3. Verify that all transformer and power connections are secure.
4. Remove the control panel lock bar. Verify the ribbon cable connections on the CIM
are correct and secure.
5. Verify the connections on the VCR and video printer are secure and correct.
4730-0036-02
Page 92
6. Refer to VCR Control Settings on page 93 and verify that the VCR is set up correctly.
7. Refer to Printer Control Settings on page 95 and verify that the color video printer is
set up correctly.
NOTE
Use the inspection procedure appropriate to the hardcopy device installed in the
system.
Reassembly
CAUTION
Use extreme care when reassembling the system to avoid pinching, stretching, or otherwise damaging the system signal and power distribution cables.
Setup
1. Reassemble the control panels and replace all covers.

2. Dispose of packing materials and clean up the unloading area.
3. Move the system to the installation location.
4. Verify proper wall outlet wiring and voltage levels have a three-prong test plug and a
DVM.
WARNING
Do not plug the system in if a wiring fault is discovered. Advise the customer immediately
and proceed only after the fault has been corrected.
5. Connect scanheads, peripheral cables, and the power cable.
6. Center the monitor Brightness and Contrast controls.
7. Verify the system fans are operating.
4730-0036-02
Page 93
8. Verify proper system operation using the procedures in Section 6, Performance

Tests.
VCR Control
Settings
NOTE
To ensure proper system operation, turn on all OEMs prior to checking system
functionality.
Panasonic AGMD830P VCR

The VCR can be programmed using the on-screen programming menu or the VCR front
panel display screen. To use the VCR's front panel screen, refer to the OEM manual or
the VCR and Report Printers Field Service Manual, P/N 4720-0223-XX.
NOTE
If the VCR was previously installed on another system, check the Serial Interface dip switch settings.
1. For systems with software versions at or above 038.15, press Setups and select
Peripherals, Internal VCR, and Panasonic MD830. Select Close at the bottom of the
display.
2. Set the MENU switch on the VCR to SET. Set the MODE LOCK switch to OFF.
3. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus
(such as, internal VCR, internal color printer, and so forth). The VCR menu lists
on-screen menu items, which are on Table 5-5.
4. Verify the VCR parameter settings. Refer to Table 5-6 for VCR front panel control
functions while in programming mode.
5. Press Setups and change the VCR configuration to SVHS to return to normal configuration.
6. Set the VCR Menu switch to OFF
4730-0036-02
Page 94
.
Table 5-5
Parameter
Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120 V VCR

Setup
Setting
Tilt Down Panel

MODE LOCK
MENU
OFF
SET
On Screen Menu
VISS
Tape Select
Auto Back
Tape In Mode
Tape End Mode
REC Tape End
STBY Off Time
Bit Length
Stop Bit
Parity
Baud Rate
Hour Meter
HI-FI REC
Audio Dub
Off
T-120 (NTSC) or E-810 (PAL)
On
Stop
Stop
Stop
5 Min.
8 Bit
Stop-1
None
9600
XXXX Hr
On
CH1
4730-0036-02
Table 5-5
Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120 V VCR

Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Edit (NTSC only)

YC Filter (NTSC only)
Off
Off
Table 5-6
Printer Control
Settings
Page 95
VCR Programming Controls
VCR Control
Programming Operation
Stop
Rewind
Play
Record
Fast Forward
Inside Search Dial
Moves the selection item cursor forward

Moves the selection item cursor backward
Returns to the previous menu page
Advances to the next menu page
Moves the menu selection to the item below
Moves the menu selection to the item above
or below
For printers that use on-screen programming, use the following procedure to setup the
printer menus.
1. Press Menu on the printer front panel.
2. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus.
3. Set the printer control settings as specified in the printer setup tables below (Table
5-7 through Table 5-16).
4. Set the Menu switch to OFF.
4730-0036-02
Table 5-7
Parameter
Page 96
Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video

Printer Setup
Setting
Color Adjustment Setup Menu

Preset
Red C-R
Green M-G
Blue Y-B
Dark
Light
Save
1
+5
+5
+5
-5
+5
1, EXEC
Analog Setup Menu

Hue (NTSC only)
Default
Color
Gain
AGC
Moni C-R
Moni M-G
Moni Y-B
Default
Default
OFF
Default
Default
Default
System Setup Menu

Display
ON
4730-0036-02
Table 5-7
Page 97

Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Beep
LCD
LCD-CNTR
Baud Rate
Monitor
User Set
ON
ON
Center
Default
EE
1
Print Setup
H-Shift
V-Shift
H-Size
V-Size
-24 Dots (NTSC)

-16 Dots (PAL)
-8 Lines (NTSC)
-10 Lines (PAL)
952 Dots (NTSC)
924 Dots (PAL)
480 Lines (NTSC)
576 Lines (PAL)
Setups
Separate
Dup-Image
Sharpness
ON
OFF
+4
System Function Menu

Remote2
C&Print
4730-0036-02
Table 5-7
Page 98

Parameter
Setting
Remote3A
Print (Does not matter. Used only with

Sony footswitch.)
Back-Sp (Does not matter. Used only
with Sony footswitch.)
CAP/SRC (Does not matter. Used only
with Sony footswitch.)
Part
Single
OFF
Remote3B
Remote3C
Clear
Capture
Timer
Control Panel Button Setups

Motion Correct
Input Select
Multi-Picture
Print QTY
Display P in P
Caption ON/OFF
OFF
RGB
1
1
OFF
OFF
Rear Panel Switches

R/G/B/Sync 75 Ohm
ON
4730-0036-02
Table 5-7
Page 99

Parameter
Setting
S-Video 75 Ohm
NTSC/PAL
OFF
Set to appropriate video format
(UP5600MD has NTSC/PAL switch;
UP5600MDU is NTSC only.)
Table 5-8
Parameter
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video

Printer Setup
Setting
Color Adj
BRT
CONT
R-Sub
B-Sub
Center
0
-8
0
0
OFF
Analog Adj
BRT
CONT
R-Sub
B-Sub
Center
0
0
0
0
OFF
4730-0036-02
Table 5-8
Parameter
Page 100

Setting
Signal Set
Input
Field
AFC
RGB
NML
OFF
Additional
Strobe
Multi: 1 for 1
Mode
Images
Separate
OFF
OFF
DIFF
2
ON
Print
Mode
L (large)
Grad
APT
Comment
Mirror
ECHO
H1
OFF
OFF
System
Size
H-Posi
Copy
USER
0
OFF
4730-0036-02
Table 5-8
Page 101

Parameter
Setting
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Page Inc
Live Sel
Convert
Buzzer
-8
10
-16
6
ON
DIGITAL
ON
ON
Rear Panel Switch Settings

IMPEDANCE - RGB
IMPEDANCE - SYNC
75
HIGH
4730-0036-02
Table 5-9
Parameter
Page 102
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory

SW Menu Control Settings Setup
Setting
Time
Month
Date
Year
Hour
Minute
Second
Not used with ultrasound systems.
Key Set
KEY LOCK
MEM&PRN
MEM&STOP
MEM&MON
PRINT&CLR
CLEAR KEY
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ONE
Signal Set
IN Sync
OUT Sync
Sync
RGB SOG OUT
H Start
0.3 V
0.3 V
NEGA
OFF
NML
4730-0036-02
Table 5-9
Page 103
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory

SW Menu Control Settings Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Spcl Timing
MON R-Sub
MON B-Sub
Print Set
PRN DIR
PRN Speed
Margin Cut
V Position
Echo Gamma Adj.
OFF
0
0
NML
NML
OFF
34
a: (64, 0)
b: (128, 0)
c: (192, 0)
System Setting
PRG All Init
Baud Rate
Remote Busy
OFF
9600
H
4730-0036-02
Table 5-10
Parameter
Page 104
Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup

Setting
COLOR ADJ
BRT
CONT
R-Sub
G-Sub
B-Sub
Center
-8
-4
0
0
0
[>]
ANALOG ADJ
Color
Tint
BRT
CONT
R-Sub
B-Sub
Center
INPUT
Input
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
0
[>]
RGB
ADDITIONAL
Multi
OFF
4730-0036-02
Table 5-10
Page 105
Parameter
Setting
Buzzer
TONE 1
PRINT
Mode
AUTO
Grad
ECHO
GAMMA ADJ
Color
Hi
Mid
Low
Low Point
Mid Point
Hi Point
Apt
Com
Mirror
Comment
ALL
0
0
0
64
128
192
N
OFF
OFF
[>]
SIZE/TIMING
H-Posi
H-Start
Size
Signal Set 1
0
NOR
WIDE
4730-0036-02
Table 5-10
Page 106
Parameter
Setting
Field
AFC
NML
OFF
Sync
R-SUB
B-SUB
EXT
0
0
Signal Set 2
IN SYNC
OUT SYNC
SYNC
RGB SOG OUT
SPCL TIMING
TTL SOG
TTL
NEGA
OFF
OFF
Print Set
DIR
MARGIN CUT
AUTO CUT
OP MODE
NORMAL
OFF
ON
4P
System Set
Page Inc
Live Sel
Convert
ON
DIGITAL
ON
4730-0036-02
Table 5-10
Page 107
Parameter
Setting
Remaining
OFF
Remote Set
BAUD RATE
COMMAND TYPE
RESPONSE
BUSY LEVEL
BUSY MODE
V SYNC MEM
9600
A
RETURN
H
NOT PRINT
OFF
Previous Error
MECHA ERROR
PRG ALL INIT
NOTHING
OFF
Table 5-11
Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup

Settings
Parameter
TCR
Gamma1
Contrast1
Anti-alias
CVPAPER
CVTRANS
DVPAPER
DVFILM
0
1.25
0
1.00
1.00
1.25
10
Better
Better
Better
Better
4730-0036-02
Table 5-11
Page 108
Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup (Continued)

Settings
Parameter
Rotate
Scale
MCM
DMAX1
CVPAPER
CVTRANS
Auto
Auto
Sharp1
170
-
Sharp1
170
-
DVPAPER
DVFILM
Auto
Bilinear
Auto
Sharp1
7
1. Adjustable in the field. None of the other default settings are recommended for field adjustment.
Table 5-12
P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings
Switch
BRIGHT
Function
Adjusts print brightness
-3
CONTRAST
Adjusts print contrast
-2
GAMMA
Adjusts the gamma curve
PRT SIZE
Changes the print size
Normal
Table 5-13
Switch
1
2
Setting
P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel

Switch Settings
Function1
Impedance
Setting
OFF (HIGH)
Trap
ON
4730-0036-02
Table 5-13
Switch
Page 109
P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel

Switch Settings (Continued)
Function1
Setting
Gain
OFF
Image
OFF (POSI)
AFC
OFF
DIR
OFF (NOR)
Memory
OFF (FRAMA)
Scan
OFF (UNDER)
Saving2
OFF
10
Paper
OFF (HD)
HPOSI
DO NOT ADJUST
AFC
DO NOT ADJUST
1. Refer to the P91W(A) Operation Manual (P/N 4740-0287-01) f

or a complete description of switch functions.
2. Switch 9 is for paper-saving mode. Install printers with the paper-saving mode turned off. If
the paper-saving mode is turned on, instruct the customer to advance the paper before
removing the print; otherwise, the patient data will be cut off the top of the print.
4730-0036-02
Table 5-14
Parameter
Front Panel
Print Size
Contrast
Brightness
Thru/EE Switch
STD/SIDE
Rear Panel
Dip Switches
GAMMA
Paper Type
Table 5-15
Page 110
Sony UP890 Video Printer

Setting
Normal
10:00
11:30
EE
STD
All ON
II
IV
Aspect Multi-Image Camera
Parameter
Setting
Brightness
Contrast
Polarity
35
45
+
4730-0036-02
Table 5-16
Final Inspection
and
Documentation
Page 111
System Setups for Video Printers and Aspect

MIC
Parameter
Setting
Use Print Button To

Environment
Print Color Images to B&W
Printer
Store to Optical Disk During
Exam
Print Local (Internal)

Print All
Yes
OFF
1. Perform a Pre-Installation Inspection if one was not previously completed. Record all
pertinent information on the Pre-Installation and Installation FSRs.
2. Verify electrical power quality using the system and its peripherals as the final load.
Also compare your pre-install observations of ambient temperature, RFI, and ESD
conditions to present conditions. Record all measurements and observations on the
Installation FSR.
3. Insert Manual Changes and Operating Notes into the system Reference Manual.
Have the Operating Instructions and the Reference Manual available for review with
the system operator so that questions can be answered during the system presentation.
4. Complete a Quality Assurance Audit (PM) sticker and attach it to left side of the monitor.
5. Tell the facilities representative the system is installed and ready for any safety tests
they normally conduct.
4730-0036-02
System
Presentation
Page 112
When the system and the customer documents are ready, present them to the operators
using the following in-service procedure.
1. Review the Customer Order Acknowledgement (COA) with the customers to familiarize them with the system and its options and to assure them that they have received
what they ordered.
2. Present and overview the System Manuals CD or printed operator manuals. Describe
these publications and emphasize that all information needed to operate the system
and peripherals is in them.
3. Show the operators how to turn on the system and any external OEMs. Explain the
differences between the main circuit breaker and the On/Standby switch.
4. Describe the initialization process and explain the system programs in this process.
5. Explain the reasons for the following cautions:
CAUTIONS
Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds
before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the system ON/STANDBY switch to
STANDBY before placing the switch back to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to
the initialization that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating
parameters and then turns off power supplies in a sequential order.
This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static
procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during
handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to
these components. Such damage to components is not covered by ATL warranties.
4730-0036-02
Page 113
6. Explain why it is important for them to never remove covers from the system because
of ESD and warranty considerations.
7. Once the system is fully initialized, give the operators a brief demonstration of system
controls. Limit the discussion of the MENU buttons to the concept that pull-down
menu boxes contain higher level commands for the functions selected by the mode
buttons. Review the following:
-
How to set Time and Hospital Name
How to enter patient data
Monitor Brightness/Contrast controls and default settings
Mode buttons
Rotary controls
Up/down spring-loaded control switches
TGC slide controls
Trackball and SELECT button; include their use with pull-down menus
Volume control
VCR and hardcopy device operation
Signal ports, including scanheads
8. Describe and demonstrate the following system maintenance procedures, to be performed as needed:
-
Fan filter cleaning
System cleaning
Scanhead disinfection
B/W printer head cleaning
4730-0036-02
Image
Optimization
Page 114
Installation: NetLink Installation
Other peripherals, as necessary
Set the system to the following settings for optimum image quality:
Follow the Monitor Adjustments on page 162 to set the background, brightness, and
contrast.
Center the TGC slidepots in a straight line. Then, adjust as necessary for patient
habitus. Set slidepots before setting a new TSI.
Compression curve to C2. Lowering compression decreases image noise.
Gray Maps and Color Maps as required by customer. (Dedicated gray maps exist for
General Imaging and Cardiac Imaging.)
GAIN and OUTPUT as required. (Reduce to decrease artifacts.)

-
Completing the
Installation
1. Discuss the present status of the system with your customer and review the hardcopy
prints that were taken during the system check out. Be sure to cover any environmental concerns as well, making suggestions as appropriate.
2. Ask your customer if there are any questions they may have about the new system or
ATL. Document their issues on the Installation FSR and make a commitment to follow-up on them.
3. Review the customer procedures to place a service call or to call for technical assistance.
4. Complete the Installation FSR.
NetLink
Installation
NetLink is installed using a site disk created from the host table, device table, and device
files, which are part of the Image Management system setups. The following steps summarize the installation process:
4730-0036-02
Page 115
1. Determine configuration information: all IP addresses, model IDs, subnet addresses

or masks, device aliases, and port numbers. Obtain the information from the network
administrator.
2. Use the configuration information and a site disk to create the host table, device table,
and device files. Use UpLink to edit, install, and copy the configuration files.
3. Verify the accuracy of the syntax of these files by selecting save and close. If there
are no errors, then the files are syntactically correct; otherwise, they are not, and the
problem is described in an error message. Edit the files, fix the syntax, and apply until
no errors occur.
4. Use the Image Management\Network Administration setups to verify the network
configuration (host table, device table, and device files). Verify the printers are displayed in the appropriate lists on the B/W and Color Printer setup panels.
5. Use the Network Configuration Menu to verify the ultrasound system appears in the
Ultrasound System Net ID and that all of the archive devices appear in the archive
list. After making a selection, reboot is required to assign the correct IP address to the
system.
6. Use the Image Management Network Administration setups to create a backup copy
of the configuration files on the system hard disk.
7. Select the correct printer and archive device(s). Create an exam, take several
images, and close the exam. Verify the images are printed and that the exam appears
on all archive devices.
8. If devices are to be added to the device table after the original network installation,
use the Upgrade selection or copy new configuration files.
9. Backup the network configuration files after upgrades or modifications to the host or
device tables.
4730-0036-02
Page 116
Detailed instructions for installing NetLink are contained in the Image Management
section of the HDI 3500 Reference Manual (P/N 4703-0036-XX).
Host Table,
Device Table,
and Device Files
The host table must contain the correct alias, IP address, port number, model ID, title,
and subnet for each device on the network. The device table maps each model ID in the
host table to a file that describes the capability of the device with that model ID. The
device files contain the capabilities of single devices that are potential network devices.
These capabilities include such things as printer type, film size, film format type, orientation, destination, and density.
Most of the attributes or capabilities listed in the device file appear as setups on the
Image Management Net Admin: B/W Printers and Color Printers system setups screens.
From these screens you can select the settings for these setups. The relationships
among the setups is dependent and logical. You must first select a printer type before the
film sizes for the printer that you select can be established.
The information in the host table, device table, and device files establishes the network
configuration. This information must be consistent, or an error message will be displayed
on the system monitor when the configuration files are saved.
The host table, device table, and device files establish the following relationships and
must be setup to reflect the network configuration:
TCP/IP addressing for server and clients on the network
DICOM print connections
Print media selection
Print media size selection
Print film type selection
Print orientation selection
4730-0036-02
Print contrast and density settings
Print format
DICOM storage device connections
Page 117
Once the network configuration has been established and set up, create a site disk by
copying the host table, device table, and device files.
4730-0036-02
Page 118
Performance Tests: Introduction
Performance Tests
Performance tests are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance (QA) Program.
Also included in the QA program are preventive maintenance inspections and procedures for customer satisfaction.
Introduction
This section contains a series of performance tests to be performed on the system following installation, upgrade, or repair. The purpose of these tests is to verify the correct
operation of the system hardware and firmware. The checklist included at the end of this
section can be used to ensure that all tests are performed.
The major test sections in this procedure are organized to follow a logical progression
through each of the major system modes. It is not a requirement to perform the sections
in any particular order. However, it is best to perform the tests in the proper order to promote a thorough and consistent testing process.
WARNINGS
Measurement accuracy must be verified after installation, after every repair involving
PCB or power supply module replacement, and during every preventive maintenance
inspection.
Wrist straps should not be worn when working on a system with its power turned on.
The +5 Vdc supply is a very high-current supply. Use caution when troubleshooting.
NOTE
Before performing these, tests the site power should be inspected in accordance
with the pre-site inspection procedures detailed in the Site Inspection section of
the General Field Service Manual.
4730-0036-02
Test
Equipment
and Materials
Page 119
Performance Tests: Test Equipment and Materials
FSE Tool Kit (P/N 193-90003-01)

Tissue Equivalent Phantom [RMI Model 413 (P/N 199-12204-00) or 406 (P/N
4500-8920-01)]
ECG/Scanhead Leakage Tester (P/N 6005-0555-01)
Initial Setup
WARNING
The following series of tests requires applying power to the system while protective covers are removed. Dangerous voltages are present. Use extreme caution.
The initial setup procedure consists of observing system power-up and initialization, verifying system configuration against the customer order acknowledgement (COA), and
adjusting the monitor for optimal viewing.
System Power
Up and
Initialization
This section verifies the status of system power supply voltages as reported by the power
supply boards.
NOTE
Before proceeding, refer to Section 3, Safety, and Power Subsystem on page

42, and review the discussion of the three power states (Off, Standby, and On).
1. Turn system off and disconnect power cord before proceeding.

2. Perform the system electrical inspection as described in Section 5, Installation.
3. Connect an array scanhead to the system.
4. Turn on all OEMs prior to checking system functionality.
5. Load OEM paper or film, as required.
4730-0036-02
Page 120
Performance Tests: Initial Setup
6. Connect the system power cord to a hospital grade AC outlet: specifically, a single
branch circuit, 15 or 20 Ampere, 120 Vac, with an isolated and insulated ground wire
(or the equivalent International circuit).
7. Set the system circuit breaker to ON (|).
8. Wait 15 seconds, then set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON (?).
9. Verify power indicators are illuminated on internal peripherals.
10. Turn on power to all external peripherals and verify power indicators are illuminated.
NOTE
Observe the required warm-up period for each peripheral before conducting
image quality tests. Refer to the OEM manual supplied with the peripheral or the
appropriate peripheral field service manual.
11. After completion of the initialization process, verify the following:

-
The scanhead connected in step 3 of this procedure is selected and enabled.
A real-time 2D image is displayed on the monitor (Figure 6-1).
12. Throughout the performance tests, verify the following:

-
The image is correctly placed on the video display.
The LEDs associated with the buttons on the control panel are lit when that feature is activated.
Toggle switches, slidepots, trackball, and other moveable controls operate

smoothly and efficiently.
4730-0036-02
Page 121
Performance Tests: Initial Setup
Figure 6-1
Power-up Display
System
Configuration
Refer to paragraph Show Installed Options on page 195 to check the installed system
options against the COA.
Monitor
Performance
The following procedure is used to set up the monitor for the performance tests in this
section and to check the range of contrast and brightness of the monitor. Refer to the
control locations in Figure 7-1.
NOTE
Refer to Monitor Adjustments on page 162 to adjust the monitor for imaging.
4730-0036-02
1. Set the background color

Color 3).
Page 122
Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
to midrange for all three colors (Color 1, Color 2, or
2. Set brightness
and contrast
black appearance.
to minimum. Verify the video display has a flat
3. Set contrast to maximum. Verify that the level of contrast varies.

4. Adjust the brightness of the lightbar from maximum to minimum.
5. Set the background color, brightness, contrast, and light bar intensity to the factory
default settings by simultaneously pressing and holding the up and down controls for
each parameter.
NOTES Focus is not currently field adjustable.
You must wait for longer than 30 seconds after changing control settings on
3500-2532-XX monitors (Brightness, Contrast, and Light Bar Intensity) for the
settings to be retained in the monitor EEPROM. Turning off the monitor power
during this period will require you to reset the control settings.
To improve the ultrasound image, see Image Optimization on page 166.
User Interface
Tests
The following tests verify various system defaults and user-selectable configuration
items, and selection of scanheads and applications.
Keyboard
1. Press Text or Title. Title allows annotation entry in the upper part of screen; Text
enters characters at cursor's active position.
2. Press each alphanumeric key and verify the appropriate character is displayed.
3. Press Shift and the arrow keys and verify the appropriate symbols are displayed.
4730-0036-02
Page 123
4. Press Shift and verify the shift functions for keys with shift characters.
5. Press remaining keys and verify proper operation. For example, Backspace, Return,
Erase Text.
Installation
Defaults Setup
1. Press the Setups key and select Display.

2. Enter the appropriate Institution name, date, and time. Select the diamonds to select
desired time and date formats.
3. Exit Setups.
Patient Data
1. Press Patient Data.

2. Select New.
3. Enter your name in the New Patient field.
4. Enter the system sales order (SO) number in the ID field.
5. Enter your birth date in Date of Birth.
6. Verify your age is displayed correctly.
7. Select Previous Exam Data and Close.
8. Close the Patient Data menu.
Scanhead
Initialization
1. Press the Scanhead key.

2. Connect the following scanheads or equivalents as shipped with the system:
L12-5 (38 or 50 mm)
L7-4
P4-2 or P5-2
D5CW
C5-2
3. Verify the scanheads connected are correctly displayed.

4. Select the desired scanhead and scanhead application. Verify the correct scanhead
is identified at the top of the screen.
4730-0036-02
Page 124
5. Verify the patient data and other information is correctly displayed and that the clock
is updating.
2D Primary
Controls
2D Gain
NOTE
The TGC graphic on the display does not correlate to the TGC slidepot positions. The TGC graphic on the display represents the actual curve used by the
beamformer.
1. Image the 406 or 413 phantom while performing these steps.

2. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position.
3. Verify that adjusting the 2D GAIN from minimum to maximum moves the displayed
TGC line from a flat line at the left edge of the depth markers to a flat line at the right
edge of the display.
4. Verify that as the 2D GAIN is increased and decreased, there is a corresponding
increase and decrease in echo intensity.
5. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range.
TGC Slide Pots

1. If the TGC display is not present, press Setups, select Display and turn TGC Display
ON. (Moving a TGC slidepot will only bring up the TGC display for three seconds.)
2. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range or higher.
3. Verify that adjusting each TGC slidepot from minimum to maximum moves the corresponding portion of the displayed TGC line from the left edge of the depth markers to
the right edge of the display.
4. Verify that increasing and decreasing the TGC gain results in a corresponding
increase and decrease in echo intensity (depends on overall gain settings).
4730-0036-02
Page 125
5. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position.
Focal Zones (number of focal zones)

1. Verify that pressing ZONES up increases the number of focal zones.
2. Verify that pressing ZONES down decreases the number of focal zones.
Focus
1. Verify that pressing FOCUS up moves the focal zone up.
2. Verify that pressing FOCUS down moves the focal zone down.
Depth
1. Verify that pressing DEPTH up decreases the displayed depth and that the frame rate
increases.
2. Verify that pressing DEPTH down increases the displayed depth and that the frame
rate decreases.
Output
1. Verify that pressing OUTPUT up increases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices.
2. Verify that pressing OUTPUT down decreases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices.
Top/Bottom
1. Verify that pressing TOP/BOT inverts the image top to bottom.
2. Verify that depth markers, focal zone marker, and the orientation marker invert.
3. Verify that adjusting the top TGC slide pot still controls the near field part of the image
while the image is inverted.
4730-0036-02
Page 126
L/R Invert
1. Place the scanhead on the phantom with the orientation marker to the left. Verify the
image orientation marker corresponds to the orientation mark on the scanhead.
2. Verify pressing L/R INVERT switches the image and the orientation marker left to
right.
Sector Width
1. With a sector scanhead, verify that pressing SEC WIDTH down decreases the sector
width.
2. Verify the frame rate increases as the sector width is decreased.
3. Verify that pressing SEC WIDTH up increases the sector width.
4. Verify the frame rate decreases as the sector width is increased.
Zoom
1. Verify that pressing ZOOM up increases the image magnification.
2. Verify the image orientation marker repositions to the far upper left of the display.
3. Verify the depth markers re-scale with the zoomed image.
4. Verify that moving the trackball allows all portions of the image to be viewed.
5. Set the zoom to normal magnification.
6. Verify the image, image orientation marker, and depth markers return to the normal
state.
HD Zoom
1. Press HD ZOOM and verify the zoom box is displayed and that the trackball will position the box anywhere within the image.
4730-0036-02
Page 127
2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and
that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it.
3. Position and size the box to surround a distinct feature (cysts or pins) within the phantom.
4. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image zooms so that the area defined within the box
is displayed to fill the image.
5. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image returns to normal magnification and that the
box is no longer displayed.
Dual
1. Press DUAL and verify the sector is displayed on the left half of the display and is
updating.
2. Press UPDATE and verify another sector is displayed on the right half of the display.
3. Verify the right sector is updating and the left sector is frozen.
4. Press UPDATE to toggle the live and frozen images from the left sector to the right,
and the right sector to the left.
5. Verify that adjusting any imaging control affects only the live sector and that each sector independently retains its imaging control settings from the last time it was active.
6. Press DUAL and verify a single full size sector is displayed.
2D Secondary
Controls
Initial Setup
1. Select 2D mode and the desired scanhead that supports Power Imaging.
2. Press 2D/MM to call up the 2D secondary control menu.
4730-0036-02
Page 128
Gray Maps
1. Verify that selecting - or + GMap changes the gray map number, the gray scale
assignment of the gray bar, and the image data.
2. Select Close between each map selection to observe changes.
Dynamic Range
1. Select PWR IMG.
2. Select PWR from the MENU controls.
3. Verify that selecting Dyn Rng changes the menu display through the range of Low,
Med, High, and Max. Verify the range of echoes in the image display vary from high
contrast to smooth.
Chroma
1. Select Chroma.
2. Select Chroma 1.
3. Verify that when Chroma is selected the 2D portion of the image is colorized.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for Chroma 2, Chroma 3, and Chroma 4.
5. Select Off from the 2D secondary control menu.
6. Select Close twice to return to 2D imaging.
NOTE
Chroma mapping allows the assignment of colors to gray scale echo intensities.
No diagnostic claims are made for Chroma mapping. There are Chroma maps
available on the 2D/M-Mode menu.
4730-0036-02
Page 129
Persistence
Verify that increasing persistence smooths the image and mid-level echoes move in slow
motion in response to scanhead movement.
1. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - Low, then Close.
2. Move the scanhead right and left. Note motion.
3. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - High, then Close.
4. Move the scanhead right and left. Compare motion to the motion in step 2.
2D Line Density
1. Select the desired scanhead and application.
2. Verify that increasing line density increases the sharpness of the resolution pins displayed in the image.
3. Verify that increasing line density decreases the frame rate.
Frame Rate
Change frame rate and verify that increasing frame rate increases the frame rate displayed on the monitor.
Biopsy
1. Select a CIVT (or a fake CIVT) scanhead.
2. Select Generic and General (clinical option and Tissue Specific preset) to initialize
the scanhead.
3. Select Biopsy on the 2D/MM menu.
4. Verify the trackball moves the cursor up and down the biopsy guideline and the distance is displayed in the lower center of the screen.
4730-0036-02
Page 130
5. Return to 2D/MM menu and deselect Biopsy.
2D Color
Primary
Controls
Initial Setup
1. Select a scanhead.
2. Select 2D Color mode.
Color Box
1. Verify the trackball will position the Color Box anywhere within the image.
2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and
that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only)

1. Press STEER. Verify the color box changes shape shifting left or right pivoting around
its center.
2. Press STEER again several times. Verify the system cycles through the various
steering angles on the display.
Filter
Verify the FILTER control changes the screen annotation.
Baseline
1. Press BASELINE up and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the top of the
color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly.
2. Press BASELINE down and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the bottom
of the color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly.
4730-0036-02
Page 131
Scale
Verify that pressing SCALE up and down will increase and decrease the range of the
color bar scale and varies the PRF value displayed.
Priority
1. Press PRIORITY up and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the
top of the bar and color overwrites the corresponding gray shades.
2. Press PRIORITY down and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the
bottom of the gray bar and gray shades overwrite the color.
Invert
Press INVERT and verify the color bar inverts.
2D Color
Secondary
Controls
Initial Setup
1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select Color Mode.
4. Display the color annotation.
5. Press the Color menu button.
Color Maps
1. Select Color Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color
bar.
4730-0036-02
Page 132
Persistence
1. Select Persistence.
2. Verify that selecting higher settings slow the color image update rate.
Line Density
Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings
produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower
frame rate.
Color Display
1. Press Superkey and CDisp.
2. Verify the color bar and the image color data are not displayed.
3. Press Superkey and CDisp.
4. Verify the color bar and the image color data are displayed.
Units
Verify that selecting FREQ or VEL changes the scaling annotation of the color bar.
NOTE
Doppler Primary
Controls
Units do not apply to Power mode.
Initial Setup
1. Select PULSED.
2. Verify the Doppler image information is displayed.
3. Select and initialize the L12-5 scanhead (L10-5 can also be used).
4. Press UPDATE.
5. Verify the Doppler display is scrolling.
4730-0036-02
Page 133
Wall Filter
Press FILTER up and verify the wall filter annotation changes from low to medium to
high.
Baseline
Press BASELINE up and down to verify the Doppler baseline can be positioned from the
top to the bottom of the scale.
Scale
Press SCALE up and down to verify the range displayed on the Doppler scale changes
and the PRF changes.
Angle Correction
1. Press 0/60 and verify the M-line changes from +60 to -60 to 0.
2. Press ANG COR. Verify the M-line moves and the annotation graphics update by 2
increments.
Sample Volume Size

Press SV SIZE and verify the displayed sample volume changes size and the annotation
is updated with the new size.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only)

Press STEER and verify the system cycles through each of the steering angles and the
M-line pivots around the sample volume.
NOTE
Position the M-line near the center of the image to see each of the three steering
angles.
4730-0036-02
Page 134
Invert
Press INVERT and verify the Doppler spectral data and the scale inverts relative to the
baseline.
Volume
1. Obtain a spectral trace.
2. Press VOLUME up or down and verify the speaker volume increases and decreases.
3. Verify frequencies above the center frequency emanate from the left speaker and
headphone, and frequencies below the center frequency emanate from the right
speaker and headphone.
Doppler
Secondary
Controls
NOTE
Obtain a Doppler image (phantom or live) while performing the tests in this section. Obtain the Doppler phantom from the customer.
Initial Setup
3. Select PULSED.
4. Press the DOPPLER menu button to display the Doppler secondary control menu.
Doppler Gray Maps

1. Select Gray Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the gray maps changes the grayscale assignment of the
Doppler data.
3. Verify the selected grayscale map is displayed in the Doppler annotation.
4730-0036-02
Page 135
Scale Units
Verify the Doppler scale displays the scale units selected.
Doppler Sweep Speed

1. Select each Doppler sweep speed.
2. Verify the right to left display movement (sweep speed) changes accordingly.
Display Format
1. Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the Doppler display
changes accordingly.
2. Select 2D.
M-mode
Primary
Controls
Initial Setup
3. Select M-mode.
M-Line
Verify the trackball smoothly moves the M-line from the left image edge to the right image
edge.
M-mode
Secondary
Controls
Initial Setup
Press 2D/MM to display the 2D/M-mode secondary control menu.
Sweep Speed
1. Select Speed.
2. Verify that as higher settings are selected, the M-mode display rate increases.
4730-0036-02
Page 136
Performance Tests: Image Quality
Display Format
Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the M-mode display
changes accordingly.
Image Quality
2D
2D Penetration
1. Select a scanhead and TSI you wish to test.
2. Set DEPTH and FOCUS depth to maximum.
3. Scan the phantom to obtain an image that clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins. Position the scanhead for optimal image of pins.
4. Press FREEZE.
NOTE
Always apply the phantom reference value and tolerance to the measurement.
5. Select Distance and set the distance caliper at the deepest vertical position where the
scatter echoes start to break up and tissue definition is lost.
6. Press Distance again to display the numerical value of penetration.
7. Verify scanhead and system performance to expected values of scanhead and settings used.
2D Axial and Lateral Resolution

1. Adjust the position of the scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that clearly
shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins.
2. Verify the image presents a uniform homogeneous echo pattern from the point of
closest focus to the limit of penetration.
4730-0036-02
Page 137
3. Adjust the focal zone position to correspond to the depth of a cyst at the depth of your
desired measurement (depending on the scanhead and presets selected).
1mm
3mm
2mm
1mm
.5mm
4. Verify the cystic structure at the focal zone is echo free,

round, and with sharp wall definition.
5. Obtain an optimal phantom image of a set of graduated
resolution pins within the focal zone. Refer to the diagram
(left). Distances between pins may vary by phantom model.
Reference your phantom user manual for measurement
details.
6. To determine axial resolution, use the values indicated in

the left column. The first adjacent pins that display a space
between them on your image is considered resolved.
-
Example: If the phantom image displays white between the second and third pins
from the bottom, the axial resolution is 1mm.
7. To measure lateral resolution, use the calipers to measure the width of a pin at the
focal zone depth. It will always measure wider than the actual pin diameter.
2D Spatial Resolution and Measurement Accuracy

Phantom elements should appear on the display relative to their actual location on the
phantom, and the system calipers should accurately measure them.
1. Adjust the position of the selected scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that
clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins.
2. Press FREEZE.
3. Using the system calipers, measure the distance between the centers of two pins that
are vertically spaced apart. Select pins that are near and far, not adjacent pins.
4730-0036-02
Page 138
4. Measure the distance between the centers of two pins that are horizontally spaced
and compare to your phantom specifications.
Cineloop Manual Playback

1. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom.
2. Press FREEZE.
3. Verify the trackball movement left or right scrolls through the captured Cineloop
frames.
Cineloop Automatic Playback

1. Display the Cineloop menu.
2. Verify the Play/Pause starts and pauses Cineloop and the image data indicates Loop.
3. Verify that selecting Sweep/Loop changes between sweep and loop mode and the
image data reflects the current mode selected.
4. Verify that selecting + Speed increases the playback speed.
5. Verify that selecting - Speed decreases the playback speed.
6. Verify that selecting Trim displays the Cineloop trim graphic.
7. Verify the trackball and SELECT allow positioning of both trim markers.
8. Verify that selecting Play/Pause loops through the frames defined by the trim markers.
Annotation
1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Adult Card/General optimized preset.
4730-0036-02
Page 139
3. Press Body Marker and verify a body marker is displayed. Press again and verify the
system scrolls through the various body markers.
4. Use the trackball to position the body marker anywhere within the image.
5. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is displayed on the body
marker.
6. Use the trackball to position the scanhead marker anywhere within the body marker.
7. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is rotated.
8. Press Erase Screen. Verify the body marker and scanhead marker are cleared from
the display.
9. Press Title to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title
field.
10. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display.
11. Press Text to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title
field.
12. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display.
13. Press Title to exit the annotation function.
Color Power
Angio
Initial Setup
1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system.
3. Select Power Imaging Mode.
4. Obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow.
5. Verify the power imaging background is of uniform texture and color.
6. Verify the colorized Doppler information is displayed within the vessel.
4730-0036-02
Page 140
7. Display the PWR secondary menu.
Power Maps
1. Select Power Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color
bar and the power imaging background.
Persistence
1. Select Persistence.
2. Verify that selecting higher settings slow the color image update rate.
Line Density
Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings
produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower
frame rate.
3D CPA
1. Adjust the scanhead position to obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow.
2. Press 3D UNCAL and acquire data.
3. Press FREEZE.
4. Press 3D/CINE to display the Cineloop secondary menu.
5. Select Create 3D or press 3D CAPTURE.
6. Verify the system indicates it is rendering a 3D image.
7. When rendering is complete, verify the system is sweeping through the 3D Cineloop.
8. Press FREEZE.
4730-0036-02
Simultaneous
Modes
Page 141
Initial Setup
1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Cerebrovascular/Carotid optimized preset.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler
1. Select PULSED.
2. Press DOPPLER MENU to display the Doppler secondary control menu.
3. Select 2D Update.
4. Select Simul.
5. Verify both 2D and Doppler are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + Color

1. Select Color mode.
2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU.
4. Select Simul.
5. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and Color are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + CPA

1. Press PULSED.
2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU.
4. Select Simul.
5. Select 2D mode.
4730-0036-02
Page 142
6. Select Power Imaging.

7. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and CPA are active.
PW Doppler
Noise Bands

3. Select Doppler mode.
4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1
PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings
Control
Setting
Output
Maximum
Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm
Sample Volume Size
1.5 mm
5. Reduce the Doppler gain until the background noise disappears.
6. Observe the spectral display for noise bands.
7. Obtain a Doppler spectral trace.
8. Increase and decrease the PRF and observe the display for noise bands.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for sample volume sizes of 2, 3, and 5 mm.
Steered CW
Doppler Noise
Bands

3. Select Doppler mode.
4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-2.
4730-0036-02
Table 6-2
Page 143
Steered CW Doppler Noise Band Control

Settings
Control
Setting
Output
Maximum
Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm
5. Press CW.
6. Press UPDATE.
7. Adjust the Doppler gain to obtain clearly visible background noise in the scrolling display.
8. Adjust the D-line 15 degrees around the centerline of the 2D image to locate the position that produces the most CW noise.
9. Adjust the Doppler gain according to Table 6-3 and verify the spectral display is clear
of noise bands.
10. Repeat this procedure using the P5-3 scanhead.
Table 6-3
CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise

Band Tests
Doppler Gain
PRF (Hz)
P4-2
P5-3
41667
31250
53
56
52
55
4730-0036-02
Table 6-3
Page 144
CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise

Band Tests (Continued)
Doppler Gain
DiskLink
PRF (Hz)
P4-2
P5-3
25000
20000
15625
14286
11905
10000
8333
5000
3731
2500
1515
59
61
65
66
69
72
75
83
86
93
95
58
61
65
66
69
72
75
83
86
93
95
Begin Exam
2. Select New.
3. Enter your name in the name field.
4. Press Patient Data to begin the new exam.
Storing Black and White Images

1. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk.
4730-0036-02
Page 145
2. Verify the system freezes the image.

3. Verify the system beeps.
4. Verify the system unfreezes the image.
5. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates a black and white image has been stored.
6. Press FREEZE.
7. Press PRINT to store six additional images.
8. Press DEL IMG.
9. Select Delete.
10. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates the last black and white image has been deleted.
Storing Color Images

1. Select Color mode.
2. Increase the Color gain until color pixels are displayed.
3. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk.
4. Verify the system freezes the image.
5. Verify the system beeps.
6. Verify the system unfreezes the image.
7. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates a color image has been stored.
8. Press FREEZE.
9. Press PRINT to store six additional images.
4730-0036-02
Page 146
10. Press DEL IMG.

11. Select Delete.
12. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates the last color image has been deleted.
13. Press END EXAM.
Reviewing Images
1. Press NET/DISK.
2. Select Hard Disk to display the exam directory on the hard disk.
3. Verify the information entered for the exam just completed is correct.
4. Select the exam just completed.
5. Select Review Images.
6. Select the Zoom Graphic on one of the stored images.
7. Verify the image is displayed in one-on-one format.
8. Select Meas/Edit.
9. Verify the image appears like a normal acquisition screen.
10. Press REVIEW.
11. Verify the image is displayed in multi-image format.
Copying Images
1. Begin a new exam.
2. Press PRINT to store an image.
3. Press END EXAM.
4. Insert a formatted optical disk in the system drive.
4730-0036-02
Page 147
5. Press REVIEW.
6. Select Exam Dir to display the list of exams on the hard disk.
7. Select the last exam.
8. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the optical disk.
9. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk.
10. Select the exam just copied to the optical disk.
11. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the hard disk.
12. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk.
13. Select the exam just copied to the hard disk.
14. Select Review Images.
15. Verify the image quality of each of the images is the same and the image quality has
not degraded.
17. Select New. Do not enter data in the Name or ID fields.
19. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk.
20. Delete all exams.
21. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk.
22. Delete all exams.
23. Press Setups.
24. Select Image Management.
25. Select Printer Selection to display the Image Management Printer setup display.
4730-0036-02
Page 148
26. Set the printer setup options as indicated in Table 6-4.

Table 6-4
Image Management Printer Setup Options
Option
Setting
B&W Film Format

Color Film Format
Printed Image Destination
2-on-1
4-on-1
B/W to B/W Printer,
Color to Color Printer
NOTE
If Printed Image Destination is set to All to B/W Printer, the images stored to the
optical disk will be black-and-white images only.
27. Select Setups Directory.

29. Select General Options.
30. For the Store Images During Exam option, select At End of Exam.
31. Select Close.
32. Press NET/DISK and eject the optical disk by selecting Eject Disk.
NetLink
1. Press Setups.
3. Select Printers.
4. Select Color or B&W print destination.
5. Select Close.
7. Select New.
4730-0036-02
Page 149
8. Enter your name in the name field.

10. Scan an RM-413 phantom.
11. Save the image and the exam.
12. Press END EXAM to end the exam.
13. Press PRINT and verify the image has been printed on the network printer.
ECG

2. Select the Adult Card/General preset.
3. Connect the ECG cable to the system.
4. Connect the white ECG cable to the RA terminals on the ECG simulator, the black
cable to the LA terminals, and the red cable to the LL terminals.
5. Set the ECG simulator settings as indicated in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5
ECG Simulator Option Settings
Option
Setting
Output
Rate
OFF/ECG/PULSE
2.0 mV
180 BPM
ECG
6. Verify the ECG R wave is a positive going pulse.

7. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 180 BPM 1 BPM.
8. Set the ECG simulator rate to 120.
4730-0036-02
Page 150

12. Display the physio secondary control menu.
13. Increase and decrease the ECG gain. Verify the amplitude of the ECG waveform
increases and decreases.
14. Increase and decrease the ECG position. Verify the vertical position of the ECG
waveform moves up and down on the display.
15. Select Configure.
16. Set Trigger A and Trigger B to on.
17. Slowly increase and decrease the A Delay. Verify the A Trigger above the ECG waveform moves to the right and left.
18. Slowly increase and decrease the B Delay. Verify the B Trigger above the ECG waveform moves to the right and left.
19. Position both triggers so they are clearly visible.
20. Press UPDATE to enable trigger mode.
21. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom and verify the image is updated at
each trigger.
22. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom again, then press FREEZE.
23. Verify the Trackball movement left or right scrolls the Cineloop marker along the ECG
waveform and the image is updated as the marker crosses each trigger.
24. Press FREEZE and verify the image updates continuously.
25. Select M-mode.
26. Center the ECG waveform in the vertical center of the M-mode display.
4730-0036-02
Page 151

29. Observe the ECG waveform. Press FREEZE as soon as a new QRS waveform is displayed.
30. Display the Meas secondary control menu.
31. Select Time/Slope.
32. Position the cursor on a distinct point on the QRS waveform and press SELECT.
33. Position the second cursor on the corresponding location on the next QRS waveform
to the left or right.
34. Verify the measured time interval is 2.00s 0.04s.
35. Press DEL MEAS.
36. Disconnect the ECG simulator.
Multiplane TEE
Scanhead Face
Temperature
Refer to the Multiplane TEE Scanhead Service Manual (4720-0292-01) to determine

whether the particular ultrasound system and scanhead are capable of detecting a scanhead over-temperature condition.
ISEM Tests
System Setup
1. Press SETUP.
2. Select Peripheral from the Directory of Setups Options.
3. Set the Internal Printer option to Select Sony Color.
4. Exit Setups.
5. Connect a cardiology (P4-2) scanhead to the system.
6. Select the Adult Card/General preset.
7. Select 2D Color mode.
4730-0036-02
Page 152
8. Display a large color box filled with color.
ISEM Setup
1. Verify the system LED is lit on the video control box.
2. Select Stress Echo as the video source. Verify the ISEM menu bar is displayed above
a blue screen, and the Stress Echo LED is lit.
3. Select Digital/Live. Verify the system video is displayed.
4. Select Setup on the Menu Bar.
5. Select Input Source.
6. Verify the video source options are as indicated in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6
ISEM Video Source Settings
Parameter
Setting
Video Source
Video Sync Type
ECG Source
Machine Type
RGB
Composite
Hidden
HDI 3500
7. Select OK.
8. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Video Calibration.
9. Set the video calibration settings as indicated in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7
Parameter
Audible ECG
ISEM Video Calibration Settings

Setting
On
4730-0036-02
Table 6-7
ECG Threshold
Brightness
Contrast
Graphics
Page 153
ISEM Video Calibration Settings (Continued)

23%
60%
50%
68%
10. Select OK.

11. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Control Panel.
12. Set the date and time setup options as indicated in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8
Parameter
Date Format
Time
Date
Mouse Tracking Speed
ISEM Date and Time Setup Options

Setting
Month-Day-Year
Current Time
Current Date
Default Value
13. Click on Done to close the Control Panel window.

14. Press CNTL+N to begin a new patient.
15. Enter your name into the name field.
16. Enter a made-up ID number into the ID field.
17. Select OK.
ISEM Footswitch
1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed.
4730-0036-02
Page 154
2. Press the left footswitch and verify the system indicates the images are being captured.
3. Press the middle footswitch and verify the system indicates it is preparing the image
for storage.
4. Press the right footswitch and verify the footswitch icons and the status bar disappear.
ISEM Hand Controller

1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed.
2. Press the
key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates the
images are being captured.
3. Press the
key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates it is pre-
paring the image for storage.

4. Capture several more images.
5. Press the
key on the hand controller and verify the footswitch icons and the
status bar disappear.

6. Select 2D mode.
Image Review
1. Select Patient Files then select Patient Directory.
2. Select a patient name.
3. Select Load.
4. Verify the menu bar indicates image x of y, where x is the image number and y is the
number of images captured.
4730-0036-02
Page 155
5. Press the left and right arrow keys on the hand controller to sequence through the
images. Verify each of the images accurately reflect the system image.
Hard Disk Clean-up

1. Select Display, then select Close all Collections.
2. Select Patient Files, then select Patient Directory and OK.
NOTE
Do not delete the patient files named TEST, NTSC (or PAL), and Monitor Setup.
3. Highlight the patient entries created during this test, then select Delete and OK.
4. Verify the selected files have been deleted.
5. Select Cancel.
6. Select System as the video source. Verify the system monitor is no longer displaying
ISEM video, and the System LED is lit.
OEM Tests
OEMs are only tested for basic functionality and their interface to the system.
VCR
1. Press COLOR.
2. Press RECORD and verify the VCR begins recording.
3. Record several minutes of image data and audio.
4. Rewind the cassette and press PLAY.
5. Verify the playback image is stable.
6. Adjust Doppler gain and color gain. Verify color hue and intensity are adjusted on the
monitor.
7. Verify the audio plays back.
4730-0036-02
Page 156
8. Pause the image during playback.

9. Verify the paused image is stable.
10. While in the Pause mode, verify the VCR will search forward and reverse where the
speed of the search is dependent on the directional movement of the VCR search
control.
11. Verify the positive flow audio is on the left speaker, and the negative flow is on the
right speaker.
12. Verify the audio volume can be varied with the volume control.
13. Press STOP on the VCR.
14. Press VCR CTRL and verify operation of the softkeys.
15. Press EJECT on the VCR.
B/W Video Printer

Verify that pressing PRINT initiates a B/W hardcopy print.
Color Video Printer

1. Select Color Doppler mode and obtain a color image.
2. Press PRINT to take a print.
3. Verify the print LED blinks when PRINT is pressed, and 45 to 90 seconds later, blinks
again three times to indicate completion of print (refer to the color printer service
manual).
4. Verify the prints have the correct image size, blanking, and color reproduction.
Multi-image Camera
1. Acquire an image using a tissue equivalent phantom (RMI 406 or 413).
4730-0036-02
Page 157
2. Set the system depth, TGC, and gain controls to mid-range. Adjust the 2D maps to
achieve a mid-level gray.
3. Press FREEZE.
4. Take a print of a positive 2D image and a print of a scrolling video display (M-mode or
Doppler).
5. Take six exposures for each sheet of film. After the sixth exposure, verify the camera
alternately displays Complete then Remove Cassette.
6. Re-install the dark slide with the black border of the dark slide outward, and remove
the film cassette from the camera.
7. Process the film and verify the following:
a. There is no video blanking visible within 1.0 mm of any image border.
b. The graybar transitions evenly from white to black.
c. The print graphics are clear, legible, and not cut-off.
d. The print density is even throughout the print.
e. There is no fogging, chemical marks, roller scratches, smudges, or light leaks.
Performance
Test Checklist
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4730-0036-02
Page 158
Menu controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dedicated pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain, Output, and Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cineloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save-Recall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulsed Doppler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Doppler Auto Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4730-0036-02
Page 159
M-Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HD Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECG/Physio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phased Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanhead Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Focal Zones and Focal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curved Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4730-0036-02
Page 160
Multi-plane TEE Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Image Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Port Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone and Audio Dub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4730-0036-02
Page 162
Adjustments: Power Supply Voltage Adjustments
Adjustments
Power Supply
Voltage
Adjustments
There are no power supply voltage adjustments. The voltages can be measured on the
PSM rear panel. Refer to Section 9, Troubleshooting, for the test point locations. If a
voltage is out of tolerance, the system will not automatically shut down, but may attempt
to cycle power continuously, until the system is manually shut off, and the PSM is
replaced. Voltages are monitored by the FEC.
Monitor
Adjustments
The HDI 3500 has FIMI or Microvitec (MV) designed monitors. The same external controls are used to adjust the display, but there are slight differences in the displayed
menus. The FIMI monitor has more contrast range and a background tint function, while
the Microvitec (MV) has an extra background balance setting.
Monitor field adjustments include contrast, brightness, color background, and lightbar.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for control locations. Additional field adjustments are available on the
FIMI monitor through a menu selection, see To access FIMI monitor menus: on page
164. Additional adjustments for the MV monitor require special tools and test instruments
and are not field adjustable.
NOTE
See also Monitor Performance on page 121
The adjustment settings are retained in an EEPROM in the monitor. Microvitec has a
delay of 30 seconds between the time the adjustment is made and the time the settings
are stored. If the ultrasound system is powered down before the MV monitor has stored
the new settings, the previous control settings are used when the monitor is powered up.
When a control is pressed, the current control setting is displayed for approximately 3
seconds. The following procedure will work for either monitor.
4730-0036-02
NOTE
Adjusting the
Monitor to the
Factory Defaults
Page 163
Adjustments: Monitor Adjustments
The following Monitor adjustment procedure applies to both the FIMI and Microvitek monitors unless otherwise noted.
Adjustments can be set to factory default settings or to any setting desired by the user.
Factory default values are chosen to give optimal monitor display quality for most clinical
applications and should satisfy most users. Default settings are recommended. Refer to
Figure 7-1 for control locations.
To set monitor controls to the factory default settings:
1. Simultaneously press the up and down contrast controls twice. The default value of
80 is displayed.
2. Simultaneously press the up and down brightness controls twice. The default value of
20 is displayed for the MV monitor and 32 for the FIMI monitor.
3. Simultaneously press the lightbar controls twice to set the light intensity. MV monitor
will display a default value of 16 on the monitor. A value is not displayed on the FIMI
monitor.
4. Press the background color control to select the background color on the display.
Color 1 is the factory default option.
5. To store the factory default settings in the MV monitor EEPROM, wait over 30 seconds before powering down the system. There is no delay for the FIMI monitor.
Adjusting the
Monitor for
Optimal Viewing
The purpose of this procedure is to optimize the monitor. It does not impact the ultrasound imaging quality. Refer to Image Optimization on page 166, or Imaging in the
HDI 3500 Getting Started Manual, to optimize the ultrasound image.
4730-0036-02
Page 164
To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing:

1. Set all the monitor settings to default values first, see Adjusting the Monitor to the
Factory Defaults on page 163.
2. Set background color to Color 1 for General Imaging and Color 2 for Cardiology applications. (Color 1 adds a blue tint to the background, Color 2 is neutral, and on the MV
monitor Color 3 adds a red tint.) The FIMI monitor has colors 1 and 2, which are
equivalent to 1 and 2 on the MV monitor.
3. Press contrast up and down controls to optimize the display to user preference.
4. Adjust the lightbar intensity to user preference.
NOTE
To retain the monitor settings, the Microvitec monitor requires a 30-second wait
after setting controls before powering down.
To access FIMI monitor menus:

1. Power off the system.
2. Power on the system while simultaneously pressing the contrast up and down controls on the monitor control panel. (Press for 5 seconds)
3. Press the color select control. A Main Menu is displayed.
4. Press the contrast and brightness up and down controls to select menu functions.
5. Parameters including image size, centering, and aspect are available for fine adjustments. Follow menu prompts to make monitor adjustments or to check firmware version and operational hours.
6. Exit the menu, changes are saved after exiting the menu.
NOTE
Do not select Service Menu items. Special factory equipment is required to

make adjustments in the Service Menu.
4730-0036-02
Page 165
Background color selection

Lightbar brightness
Monitor brightness
Monitor contrast
Figure 7-1
Monitor Control Locations
4730-0036-02
Image
Optimization
Page 166
Adjustments: Image Optimization
There is variation in the monitor brightness and contrast settings from user to user.
The recommendation is to set the monitor contrast to 80 and brightness to 20 for the MV
monitor and 32 for the FIMI. Higher brightness levels produce flat images. This setting
consistently provides clean images without noise. Other factors that impact image quality
are as follows:
TGC controls
-
TGC slide pots are returned to a straight line BEFORE selecting a new TSI. It is
critical to obtaining a good image and necessary to get the full range of adjustment.
Setting the TGC controls in a straight line may not result in the perfect image,
since imaging varies with anatomy. Manual manipulation is necessary to obtain an
optimal image. Optimal image for each patient may not result in a smooth TGC
ramp.
Dynamic Range Compression Settings

-
Use the COMPRESS control to vary the Dynamic Range and the compression
curve applied. The default setting reads 130dB/C4.
A higher compression setting reduces noise levels in the image, optimal for shallow imaging of high-velocity vessels.
A lower setting increases contrast and sensitivity, optimal for deep low-velocity
vessels.
Bring up the compression in THI to give the image a slightly more fundamental
look.
For General Imaging situations, try bringing this down to C2, depending on the
scanning situation and personal preferences.
4730-0036-02
Page 167
Adjustments: Image Optimization
Gray Maps: There are dedicated gray maps for General Imaging and Cardiac Imaging. Toggle through these to find the best fit for a customer.
Output Control: The OUTPUT control, formerly called POWER, varies the amount of
energy the scanhead emits. In certain clinical situations, reducing output may help
decrease artifacts. This is especially true for reverberation artifacts seen in vessels
and in a uterus with a posterior placenta. Reducing output may not remove them
completely, but it will improve the image. Use in conjunction with gain.
Look for the best echo window

-
Move the transducer around and take advantage of any fluid pockets or uniform
tissue present.
Artifacts seen from one view may be entirely absent from a different window. Partial volume artifacts around cystic structures are an example here. Do your best to
avoid the curving walls of cystic structures and help the customer understand this.
4730-0036-02
Page 168
Preventive Maintenance: Fan Filter
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance inspections are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance
(QA) Program. Also included in the QA program are performance tests and procedures
for ensuring customer satisfaction.
Fan Filter
1. Remove the filter (PN 2950-1148-01) from under the front of the system.
2. Vacuum and reinstall the filter.
3. Demonstrate filter cleaning procedure to customer.
Optical Disk
Drive Head
Cleaning
The recommended interval for cleaning the lens (head) internal to the (optional) optical
disk drive is once every six months. The procedure for head cleaning is to insert a
head-cleaning cartridge (P/N 2100-1419-01) into the optical drive with power applied.
The head-cleaning cartridge will load, automatically clean the head, and automatically
unload when the cleaning cycle has completed (approximately 10 seconds).
The condition of the head-cleaning cartridge is important to the process. Inspect the condition of the cleaning brush by opening the shutter of the cleaning cartridge. Check to
see if the tip of the cleaning brush is open. If it is, use a newer head-cleaning cartridge.
Other
Maintenance
1. Verify screws are securely in place on all PCB hold down tabs (PIM, CPU, ADAPTR,
ACIM, DDEA, and IIM).
2. Verify all screws are securely in place on the Scanhead Select PCB. Tighten the
screws in the correct sequence. Do not over tighten. Damaged screws or PEM nuts
may require card cage replacement.
4730-0036-02
Page 169
Preventive Maintenance: Other Maintenance
3. For domestic U.S. field service, copy the diagnostic data to an optical disk, send the
disk to ATL Technical Service (MS 440), and reset the error log. Write your name,
FSE number, and the system serial number on the disk so it is returned to you.
4. Update the backup system files using UpLink and leave the disk accessible to the
customer.
5. Check trackball operation for excessive drag or inconsistent cursor movement. Clean
and adjust the tension or replace it with an adjustable style, see Trackball on page
170.
6. Verify all cooling fans are operational.
7. Run the Machine Comprehensive Test, verify system functionality.
8. Check resolution, penetration, and image quality.
9. Inspect the casters as follows:
a. Inspect for signs of wear and replace if necessary.
b. Replace caster hubcaps that are missing.
c. Check that caster brakes are operational. If broken, order brake lever knob P/N
1065-2611-02.
10. Verify the OEM bay contains no OEMs that are hard-wired to the ACIM.
11. Re-attach loose rubber bumpers and touch up paint scratches.
12. Perform other cleaning and inspection procedures per Customer Service policy.
13. Fill out a quality assurance label. Attach it to the system per Customer Service policy.
Cover the label with a label overlay:
-
Label, P/N 4100-0940-01
Overlay, P/N 4100-0941-01
4730-0036-02
Trackball
Page 170
To clean and adjust the trackball tension:

NOTE
This procedure applies only to trackballs having adjustable tension rings (P/N
2100-1656-01). Replace failed non-adjustable trackballs with the adjustable
type.
1. Trackballs with removable seals can be cleaned without removing the assembly from
the control panel. Remove the seal ring with the adjustment tool as shown in
Figure 8-1, and lift the trackball out with tape or by tilting the control panel.
2. Vacuum and wipe clean the trackball and the assembly with a damp paper towel or
rag. Using solvents or cleaners is not recommended.
3. Reassemble as shown in Figure 8-1.
4. Adjust trackball seal ring with adjustment tool (P/N 2100-1657-01) until its tension is
satisfactory to the user and it operates smoothly.
5. If unable to adjust the tension so it operates smoothly, replace the assembly.
4730-0036-02
Page 171
1. Unscrew seal
with tool
P/N 2100-1657-01
4. Install and tighten seal

for acceptable drag
2. Remove seal
3. Disassemble, clean and

reassemble
Figure 8-1
Cleaning the Trackball
4730-0036-02
Page 172
Troubleshooting: Introduction
Troubleshooting
Introduction
The HDI 3500 Ultrasound System contains extensive software and hardware diagnostic
capabilities. However, the system must boot up before the operator has access to diagnostics. This section contains information on the core bootup fault isolation procedure,
system alerts, general fault isolation, and system diagnostics.
Core Bootup
Fault Isolation
The HDI 3500 System requires the following PCBs for core bootup: ACIM, PSM, AIM,
UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM, SYSCPU, DDEA, and CTRBRD. It also requires the control interface module cables, the video cable, and the monitor for core bootup.
NOTE
Core bootup may take up to 25 minutes if there are malfunctioning PCBs or

missing PCBs.
The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows:

1. Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY and circuit breaker to off. Unplug the system power cord.
CAUTION
Ensure the circuit breaker is set to off before removing PCBs.

2. Verify all card cage PCBs required for bootup (ACIM, PSM, AIM, CPANEL, IIM, PIM,
PCM, SYSCPU, and DDEA) are securely seated into the CTRBRD.
3. Verify all cables to the IIM and ACIM are properly connected.
4. Set the circuit breaker and the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.
4730-0036-02
Page 173
Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
5. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, insert the backup disk into the optical
drive and attempt to boot the system from the optical drive. If the system does not
bootup, continue with step 7.
6. If the system boots up from the optical drive, replace the hard drive. The hard drive
should be loaded with 150.23 software or higher.
7. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, turn the circuit breaker to off, and
remove the PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel
Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs. Reboot the system.
If the system boots up with the PCBs removed, one of the removed PCBs was preventing other PCBs from accessing a bus. Replace the PCBs individually until you
determine the faulty PCB.
NOTES It will take several minutes (up to 25 minutes) for the system to boot without the
PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel
Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs.
With the FEC removed, the system will turn on, but not turn off. Use the circuit
breaker to turn the system off.
8. Check the LEDs on each PCB. Refer to Figure 9-1, Figure 9-2, Table 9-1 and Table
9-2.
NOTE
The system monitors the power supply enable voltages to ensure they are within
tolerance. If the voltages are not within the tolerances listed in Figure 9-3, the
system will shut down. If the system shuts down, none of the voltages will be
enabled (all voltages will be 0V). If the system shuts down because of a power
supply failure, check the PSM LEDs referring to Figure 9-1 and Table 9-2. Refer
to Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4 for PCB voltage locations.
4730-0036-02
PS1
PSM
PS2
PS3
A1F
A2F A3F A4F
Page 174
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
A5F A6F A7F A8F A9F A10FA11FA12FA13FA14F
FEC
HVDC OK
OVP TRIG
DS7
DS8
Figure 9-1
Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front)
Reset switch
4730-0036-02
A8B IMEM
A4B PSP2
A3B PCM DSP

ENET DS1
DSP
DS2
MOP DS3
Page 175
SCIP
MOP
WRITE DS1
READ DS2
IBUS
DS3
ERROR
DS1
IIM Not shown

(No LEDs)
HVDC to PSM
A12B AIFOM
Not Used
DS1
DS2
Power to HVDC
HVDC output to card cage
A12B AIFOM
A
1
B
A A A A
2 3 4 5
B B B B
A A A
6 7 8
B B B
A A A A A
9 10 11 12 13
B B B B B
A5B PSP1
SCIP
MOP
ON
OFF
SCIP
MOP
DS1
DS2
A11B SSP
SCSI
A6B CPU
SCIP
MOP
PTX
PTR
Figure 9-2
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
A2B PIM
(LEDs not visible. Located
behind PCB cover)
DS5
DS6
TRAP
PAP
SCIP
MOP
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
A9B ADAPTR
Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear)
DAD
SCIP
MOP
DS3
DS2
DS1
4730-0036-02
Table 9-1
Page 176
Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence
Core Bootup Sequence
Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1
Main power switch off, ON/STANDBY

switch off
AC power to ACIM
Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY
switch off
HVDC to PSM
Logic connection made to ON/
STANDBY switch
Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY
switch on (system power on)
Individual power supply voltages are
turned on 2-3 seconds after Main
Power switch or ON/STANDBY switch
is turned on
PCBs get power and begin
initializing
PIM generates test pattern
CPNL, UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM data
path established
HD loads applications and operating
system to CPU
CPU completes bootup
CPU/PCM establish client/server
ACIM - all LEDs off.
ACIM - LEDs #6 and #7 are lit continuously. #6

indicates power to HVDC transformer after internal
fuse F1 (ACIM input). #7 indicates HVDC to PSM
(ACIM output). Fans are off.
CPNL - LEDs lit for 5 seconds, flash 4 times, then
off
PCM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
PIM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
CPU - SCIP quick flash, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz
PCM - DS1 on, all others pulse
Monitor - color test pattern, blank screen, gray
pattern
Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2 for SCIP and
MOP information
Fans - full speed for 2 seconds, 3/4 speed until
bootup, then 1/2 speed
4730-0036-02
Table 9-1
Page 177
Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence (Continued)
Core Bootup Sequence
Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1
System Initialization
CPU begins loading subsystem
PCBs
CPU/PCM client/server operational
HD/DDEA completes loading
applications and operating system
IDs and configuration are checked
System operational files loaded and
scanheads initialized
Core bootup complete
CPU using applications, SW, and
MO files, checks configuration
CPU checks bootup error status
UIF enabled
CPU - SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz

PCM - top LED stays on, all others pulse
Monitor - ATL logo, Splash Screen
SHSEL - relays energize. System bootup time is
approximately 1.5 minutes
ACIM - LED #1 flickers at 1 Hz
Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2

Monitor - displays 2D image and static graphics
(Static graphics displayed only if scanhead is
connected to system during bootup)
Fans - Fan speed depends on the card cage
temperature averaged from 4 thermistors located
on PCBs throughout the card cage. Correct fan
voltage is sent from PSM to the fans (12 Vdc - +24
Vdc)
1. The sequence described is the normal sequence of events during core bootup. If these visual indications are not
observed, refer to the Core Bootup Fault Isolation procedure.
4730-0036-02
Table 9-2
PCB
Page 178
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup

Slot
Location
Card Cage, Front

PSM
PS1
PS2
PS3
FEC
A4F
LED Status
DS1 - HVDC OK - Normally lit. Indicates that 155 Vdc is
present to the PSM
DS2 - OVP TRIG - When lit, indicates that +6 V or -6 V have
higher than normal voltage, or -5.2 V current limiting has been
activated (-5.2 V circuits are drawing more than 14.3 A).
DS1 - not used
DS2 - not used
DS3 - MOP Fail - When lit, indicates MOP did not bootup
DS4 - MOP LED1
DS5 - SCIP LED2
DS6 DS7 DS8 -
Card Cage, Rear

PIM
A2B
DS1 - Control panel interface processor LED

DS2 - SCIP / MOP LED2
4730-0036-02
Table 9-2
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup (Continued)
PCB
Slot
Location
PCM
A3B
LED Status
DS1 - Flickers when Ethernet communications with the CPU
are active
DS2 - DSP LED, flickers during image bus processing
DS3 - MOP LED1
DS1 - During power up, is momentarily on while its program is
loaded from PSP1. After bootup, is an activity indicator (glows
according to how busy the PSP2 is.) During high frame rates/
color the LED should stay lit. Flickers when scan converting
PSP2
A4B
PSP1
A5B
DS1 - SCIP LED2
A6B
DS2 - MOP LED1

DS1 through DS3 - not used
CPU
Page 179
DS4 - SCIP LED2
IMEM
A8B
DS5 - MOP LED1

DS6 - PTX, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU
DS7 - PTR, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU
DS8 through DS11 - not used
DS1 - Write LED, flickers during scanning
DS2 - Read LED, flickers during scanning
DS3 - IBUS ERROR LED, is normally off
4730-0036-02
Table 9-2
Page 180
PCB
Slot
Location
ADAPTR
A9B
LED Status
DS1 - TRAP (Translation Processor) LED, flickers in all
scanning modes. In 2D or Doppler the rate is so fast the LED
appears constantly on. In Color the rate is visible
DS2 - PAP (Physio-Audio Processor) LED, off in all modes
DS3 - SCIP LED2
DS4 - MOP LED1
SSP
A11B
DS1 - MOP LED1 Will blink faster if the system is in M-mode,

Doppler, or Color. If nothing is in flash EPROMs, the LED
continues to blink at the bootup rate
DS2 - SCIP LED2 When receiving messages the LED will
flicker
AIFOM
A12B
DS3 - DAD LED Off after bootup. If in Doppler, the LED is on or

off. If in Color, the LED blinks at an irregular rate, unless the
system is in Freeze mode. If in M-mode, the LED blinks at a
regular rate (DAD = Data Dispatcher processor)
DS1 - not used
DS2 - not used
DS5 - SCIP LED2
DS6 - MOP LED1, Blinks at one-second intervals during
system bootup and two-second intervals when loading flash
code
4730-0036-02
Table 9-2
Page 181
PCB
Slot
Location
ACIM
PS5
LED Status
DS1 - After system bootup, flashes at approximately 1 Hz.
Indicates HVDC to PSM after system bootup
DS2 - not used
DS3 - not used
DS4 - not used
DS5 - not used
DS6 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on).
Indicates power to HVDC after internal fuse F1
DS7 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on).
Indicates HVDC +155VDC from rectifier to PSM
1. The Module Operation Processor (MOP) controls PCB operation. The MOP LED blinks at one-second intervals during
system bootup, and at a two-second rate after bootup.
2. The Serial Communications Interface Processor (SCIP) communicates between the PCB and the CPU. The SCIP LED
blinks at one-second intervals after bootup.
4730-0036-02
P2
P3
Figure 9-3
Test Points
GND
-15 V
+15 V
-12 V
+12 V
-6 V
+6 V
-5.2 V
+5 V
GND
GND
-HV/10
+HV/10
FAN
+3.3 V
REF +5 V
REF 2.5 V
+5 V STBY
+2.5 V STBY
GND
Page 182
Tolerances
0.45 Vdc
0.36 Vdc
0.12 Vdc
0.104 Vdc
0.10 Vdc
-HV X 0.0991 2%
+HV X 0.0991 2%
0+0 +24 V
Not currently used
0.10 V
When lit, indicates HVDC is present.
0.05 V
0.10 V
When lit, indicates over voltage
0.05 V
protection is on or -5.2V current
limiting has been activated.
HVDC OK
OVP TRIG
PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3)
4730-0036-02
Page 183
Troubleshooting: Alert Information
CAUTION
ACIM LED 6 indicates

power to HVDC after
internal fuse F1
(12A 25VDC FB)
Remove power to the system by

disconnecting the power cord and waiting
15 seconds before removing or replacing
power supply PCBs. Otherwise, damage
to PCBs and the Motherboard will result.
ACIM LED 7
indicates HVDC
+155VDC from
rectifier to PSM
ACIM LED 1 indicates

HVDC to PSM when the
system has booted up
ACIM LEDs 2 - 5 are
not used
ACIM
Figure 9-4
ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5)
Alert
Information
Alerts indicate the system has detected a performance problem. These performance
problems are caused by hardware faults or by system sensitivity to a particular series of
keystrokes made by the operator. Alerts have a blue banner across the top of the dialog
box.
4730-0036-02
Page 184
Troubleshooting: Alert Information
To remove the alert from the display:

1. Simultaneously press Superkey and F6 (the sixth key to the right in the top row of
oval-shaped keys on the lower user interface) to display a second page of error information (Figure 9-5).
2. Print or record the information on the second page. The second page of error information identifies the file and the line of software code containing the error.
3. Start troubleshooting with UpLink and Diagnostics.
4. Repeat step 1 to remove the alert message from the display and to continue scanning
or other diagnostic procedures.
4730-0036-02
Page 185
Troubleshooting: User Event Log
Is 0.6 MI 1.0
r #234 14.2cm
Tests and Utilities

Alert
An error has been detected.
Please record the following information and
call ATL Technical Support.
Feature-Diags.zErrStdENOENT
(0104-20000002)
ERROR Subsystem Feature-Diags Errno: zErrStdENOENT (0104-20000002)

Software Version: 4252-0815-12 124.11
File: VDiagsSoftware.c Line Number: 639
Priority: Alert-ErrorBanner Date: 08/20/1998 Time: 12:09:14
ErrnoInfo: No such file or directory
UserInfo:
Test of Priority Alert.
Figure 9-5
Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed
User Event
Log
The user event log is helpful in determining the cause of system lockups by recording the
sequence of user events (keystrokes or control activations) that resulted in the system
lockup. The log records the last 500 keystrokes or control activations and the time they
were entered from the system control panel. The event sequence is retained even if the
system power switch and the circuit breaker are turned off. Any one of 10 pages of user
4730-0036-02
Page 186
events are displayed with 50 events on each page (2 columns of 25). The user events
may include keystrokes, slidepot changes, control knob rotations, or trackball movements.
1. Verify the system has booted up.
2. Simultaneously press and hold Superkey and Shift. Press the characters indicated in
Table 9-3 to display the user event log for the desired language. Page 10 is displayed
with the previous 50 events listed.
Table 9-3
User Event Log Language Differences

Keystrokes Required
Test
English
French
German
User Event Log
spacebar
3. Select Next on the bottom of the display to display the next page or Prev to display
the previous page. The display appears similar to Figure 9-6.
4. Select Reset Log to clear all entries from the event log.
5. To exit, select Close on the bottom of the display. The display returns to the previous
imaging mode.
4730-0036-02
Page 187
User Log
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
11:47:35
12:07:44
12:07:44
12:07:51
12:07:51
12:07:58
12:08:06
12:08:58
12:09:14
12:09:45
12:17:20
12:17:23
12:17:29
12:17:58
12:18:01
12:18:13
12:18:14
12:19:30
12:19:40
12:19:41
12:19:58
12:19:58
12:19:59
12:19:59
12:20:03
Timeout
PushBtn
End
Superkey
Start
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
Button
Button
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
End
Start
PowerUp
OK
ConfirmDialog
Diags
Diags
OK
Tests, Utils.
Execute
Execute
3D
3D
Hide
Error Log
Close
Close
Diags
ProgressDialog
Start
ModeChange
Acquiring
PushBtn
End
Superkey
ConfirmDialog
2d
2d
OK
ConfirmDialog
Diags
--------------
Close
Figure 9-6
User Event Log
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
08/20/98
12:20:03
12:20:08
12:20:12
12:21:04
12:23:52
12:23:57
12:24:00
12:24:15
12:24:22
12:24:27
12:24:29
12:24:32
12:24:32
12:24:35
12:24:39
12:24:47
12:24:48
12:24:48
12:54:50
12:54:50
13:24:51
13:54:53
14:14:23
14:14:23
14:18:43
Reset Log
Start
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
End
PushBtn
Start
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
PushBtn
Acquiring
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Button
Acquiring
Start
Prev
Diags
OK
Error Log
Show
User
Sys.
Return
Close
User Login
OK
Cancel
Diags
Close
Menu
UIF
Close
Close
Menu
Freeze
Freeze
2d
UserLog
Next
10 of 10
4730-0036-02
Formatting
Disks
Page 188
Troubleshooting: Formatting Disks
To format a blank optical disk:

1. Boot up the system.
2. Press NET/DISK.
3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch
closed).
4. Insert the disk into the optical drive.
5. Select the Format Disk option displayed at the top left of the display. The optical drive
LED will light during formatting.
6. Select the Eject Disk option to eject the formatted disk.
7. Press NET/DISK again or select Close at the bottom of the menu to return to the previous imaging mode.
Backing Up
Presets
To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk:

1. Boot up the system.
2. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed.
3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch
closed).
4. Insert the disk into the optical drive.
5. Select Tissue Specific Presets (Figure 9-7).
6. Select Copy. The process of formatting and copying the presets to the optical disk
takes several minutes.
NOTE
If the disk needs formatting, display prompts will guide you through the format
procedure. After formatting the disk, repeat step 6 and continue with the procedure.
4730-0036-02
Page 189
Troubleshooting: Backing Up Presets
7. To copy the presets from the optical disk to the hard drive, select Install.
Close
Figure 9-7
Setups Directory
Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets
4730-0036-02
Core Dump
Utilities
Page 190
Troubleshooting: Core Dump Utilities
The core dump utilities are used to simultaneously store error data to the hard disk and
the optical disk, or to the hard disk only. This procedure is similar to the Backup Diags
Data procedure in Backup Diags Data on page 202. Service personnel will follow their
local service policy prior to performing the procedure.
To use the core dump utilities to backup data:
1. Verify the system clock is updating. (A sector or linear image is displayed.)
2. Verify the blank formatted optical disk is not write-protected (not write protected =
notch closed). If your disk needs formatting, refer to Formatting Disks on page 188.
3. Insert the blank disk into the optical drive.
4. To write files first to the hard disk then copy them to the optical disk, refer to step a. To
write files only to the hard disk, refer to step b.
a. Simultaneously press Superkey, Shift, and Text C. This procedure will take
approximately 5 minutes. The LED on the optical drive will be lit continuously as
the drive is storing data to the disk. The optical disk will be automatically ejected
once the data transfer has been completed.
NOTE
When performing this task, the system clock stops and there is no dialog box or
message displayed.
b. Simultaneously press Superkey, Shift, and Text D. This procedure will take
approximately 3 minutes. The core files will be automatically transferred to an optical disk the next time the Backup Diags Data (Backup Diags Data on page 202)
procedure is performed.
5. Label the disk with the following information:
-
Service Order (S.O.) number
4730-0036-02
Machine ID number
Chassis ID number
Account name
Install date
FSE number or name
NOTE
Page 191
Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
The disk will be replaced or returned for re-use.
6. Return the disk to ATL Bothell (TSG, mail stop 440) to the attention of TSG, or follow
your local service policy. The information on the optical disk will be analyzed and the
disk will be returned to you.
User
Diagnostics
The user diagnostics enable the user to access several diagnostic capabilities. These
capabilities enable the user to quickly diagnose system operational status or acquire the
information needed to assist others in system diagnosis.
To access the user diagnostics:
1. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed.
2. Select Diagnostics in the lower left corner of the display. The display appears as in
Figure 9-8.
3. Move the cursor over an item and press SELECT to highlight your choice of tests to
run from the list of Available Tests and Utilities.
4. Select Start to initiate the highlighted test.
NOTES The Comprehensive Test takes up to 20 minutes to run. The Check Installed
Software utility takes over 10 minutes to run.
4730-0036-02
Page 192
Refer to Comprehensive Test on page 193 to run the Comprehensive Test.

Information on the other tests and options is listed in Check Installed Software on page 194 through Video Test Patterns Utility on page 204.
Diagnostics
Available Tests and Utilities:
Comprehensive Test
Check Installed Software
Select a test or utility from the list.

Press "Start" to start it.
The results will be written below.
Show Bootup Status Report

Show Machine Configuration
Show Installed Options
Backup Diags Data
Start/Stop
Video Test Patterns Utility

Results:
Clear
Save...
Search String:
Eject
Figure 9-8
Initialize Modem
User Diagnostics Menu
Find
Next Error
Close
Setups Directory
4730-0036-02
Comprehensive
Test
Page 193
The Comprehensive Test is used to determine system operational status. The test comprises numerous sub-tests run sequentially in the opposite order of data flow, and tests
approximately 90 percent of the card cage circuits. If a sub-test fails, the system completes the remaining sub-tests. When the Comprehensive Test has been completed, the
results are displayed on the monitor with a message indicating pass or fail.
If a sub-test fails, the comprehensive test fails and a failure code is displayed. There are
over 10,000 possible error codes that log events, timing errors, logic faults, and failure
data. The code is for engineering use only. It has no value to field personnel, but displayed errors and error logs can be useful when reported to ATL technical support. To
capture diagnostic data for analysis, follow To use the core dump utilities to backup
data: on page 190 and follow the directions of your ATL technical support person.
Run the Comprehensive Test any time a system error is displayed or when the user suspects problems with the system. If an error message is displayed during the test, note the
error and reboot the system with the ON/STANDBY switch.
The test takes from 15 to 20 minutes to run, depending on which software version is
installed in the system. Also, the Comprehensive Test results are most reliable when run
right after the system boots up.
To invoke the Comprehensive Test:
1. Verify there are no scanheads connected.
2. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in
Figure 9-8.
3. Highlight Comprehensive Test.
4. Move the cursor to the START button. Press SELECT. A windowed message is displayed stating, This test will take more than fifteen (15) minutes.
4730-0036-02
Page 194
5. Move the cursor to the Continue button. Press SELECT. The results window displays
dots as an indication of the status of the test. If a failure occurs, an error code is displayed.
6. To exit the Diagnostics Menu, select Close. The following note is displayed:
NOTE
System parameters have changed. It is necessary to reboot the machine before

further scanning can be done.
7. Use the trackball to select the Reboot option. Press SELECT to reboot the system.
Check Installed
Software
This test comprises Cyclic Redundancy Checks (also known as CRCs) of all read-only
system software files. If a CRC fails, it may indicate a disk drive problem or a corrupted
file. Reinstall the system software and check the DDEA PCB.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Check Installed Software.
3. Press SELECT to highlight the option.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A message is displayed stating Please
wait, this process will take approximately 2 minutes.
5. Use the trackball to select OK. Press SELECT. The Start button changes to a Stop
button. When the test is complete, the results are displayed in the results window, and
the Stop button turns into the Start button again. The results are displayed as Completed: PASS (or FAIL).
6. Select Stop to abort the test if needed.
Show Bootup
Status Report
During system bootup, the CPU queries the individual PCBs and displays the bootup status on the monitor.
4730-0036-02
Page 195
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Bootup Status Report.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The system instantaneously displays a note stating the Bootup status reported NO errors. Test results
are displayed as Completed: PASS (or FAIL).
Show Machine
Configuration
The Show Machine Configuration option displays the machine ID number, hard disk part
number, and software version (software build) number. The machine ID number is a
unique number assigned to each system and is programmed into a chip on the SYSCPU
PCB. All machine options to be installed onto a particular system must contain the correct machine ID number for that particular system or no options will be enabled.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Machine Configuration.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The results are displayed as:
Machine ID: 0000005fXXXX
Hard-Disk Software: 4252-0XXX-XX 1XX.XX (X indicates a numerical placeholder).
Show Installed
Options
The Show Installed Options selection displays the system options installed on a particular system, whether those options were purchased when the system was ordered or for
an upgrade. Refer to the COA (Customer Order Acknowledgement) for the customer
4730-0036-02
Page 196
ordered features, and check the installed options list for the options configured for the
system. If there is a discrepancy, order a Machine Options Configuration disk for that particular system. Re-install the files from the new machine options disk onto the hard drive
and check the configuration again.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Installed Options.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option.
5. Refer to Table 9-4 for a list of the machine options possible with each released software version. Machine options will be added as the system matures through the product life cycle.
NOTE
Table 9-4
If there are no machine options listed for a particular software version, that software version is not listed in the following table.
Machine Options/Software Build

Compatibility Matrix
Part Number Description

1
2
3
150.23
151.09
Software Versions
8501-8507-01 Extended Doppler Capability l l

8501-8507-02 Extended Doppler Capability l l
EMI
8501-8523-01 English Language/UIF
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 197

Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
150.23
151.09
Software Versions
8501-8524-01
8501-8525-01
8501-8523-02
8501-8524-02
8501-8525-02
8501-9622-01
8501-9058-01
8501-9060-01
8501-9062-01
8501-9064-01
8501-8533-01
8501-8534-01
8501-8536-01
8501-8536-02
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
German Language/UIF
French Language/UIF
English Language
German Language
French Language
Italian Language
Danish Language
Norwegian Language
Swedish Language
Finnish Language
Voltage/Video 120 NTSC
Voltage/Video 230 NTSC
Voltage/Video 230 PAL
Voltage/Video 230 PAL
IEC-601-1
18 8501-8665-01 NTSC Video
19 8501-8666-01 PAL Video
20 8501-8563-01 Capability, L7-4 38 mm
ll
ll
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 198

150.23
151.09
Software Versions
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
8501-8565-01
8501-8567-01
8501-8574-01
8501-8576-01
8501-8579-01
8501-8585-01
8501-8586-01
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
28
29
30
31
8501-8587-01
8501-8589-01
8501-8595-01
8501-8596-01
32
33
34
35
36
8501-8597-01
8501-8598-01
8501-8600-01
8501-8601-01
8501-8604-01
Capability, L10-5 38 mm
Capability, C4-2 40R
Capability, CIVT5
Capability, P3-2 20 mm
Clin. Opt., Vasc: TCD
Clin. Opt., Vasc: Cerebro
Vasc
Clin. Opt., Vasc: Peripheral
Clin. Opt., Vasc: Introp
Clin. Opt., Genim: Abdomen
Clin. Opt., Genim: Small
Parts
Clin. Opt., Genim: Prostate
Clin. Opt., Genim: Pediatric
Clin. Opt., OB
Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert
Capability, D5 CW
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 199

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
150.23
151.09
Software Versions
8501-8606-01
8501-8607-01
8501-8612-01
8501-8621-01
8501-8622-01
8501-8625-01
8501-8626-01
8501-8652-01
8501-8653-01
8501-8654-01
8501-8655-01
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
48 8501-8656-01
49
50
51
52
8501-8657-01
8501-8668-01
8501-8683-01
8501-8687-01
Capability, D10 CW
Capability, D2 TC
Capability, C3.5 76R
Capability, C7-4 40R
Capability, C9-5 ICT
Capability, CL10-5 26 mm
Color Power Angio
Capability, MPT7-4
Clin. Opt., Card: Adult
Clin. Opt., Card: Ped/Fetal
Echo
Clin. Opt., Card:
Transesophag.
Capability, CW2
DiskLink
NetLink
Steered CW
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 200

150.23
151.09
Software Versions
53
54
55
56
8501-8688-01
8501-8689-01
8501-8694-01
8501-8695-01
ll
ll
ll
ll
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
8501-8696-01
8501-8697-01
8501-8698-01
8501-8699-01
8501-9100-01
8501-9102-01
8501-9103-01
64 8501-9104-01
65 8501-9108-01
66 8501-9109-01
Color M-Mode
Frame Grab
Triple Mode
3D Color Power Angio
Imaging
Capability, C8-5
Capability, CT8-4
Capability, LI9-5
Capability, L12-5 38 mm
Capability, C8-4v
Clin. Opt., Neurosurgical
Clin. Opt., Abdominal
Surgery
Clin. Opt., Card:
Musculoskeletal
Clin. Opt., Card: CSI
TSI Patient Optimization
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 201

150.23
151.09
Software Versions
67 8501-9127-01 Clin. Opt., Harmonic

Research
68 8501-9134-01 Capability, BPT9-5
69 8501-9155-01 WebLink
70 8501-9165-01 Clin. Opt., Card: THI
71 8501-9166-01 ResearchLink
ll
72 8501-9167-01 Service Access Diagnostics

73 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast
Imaging
74 8501-9266-01 Capability, LAP L9-5
75 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast
Imaging
76 8501-9339-01 Capability, P4-2 20 mm
77 8501-9342-01 Capability, L12-5 50 mm
78 8501-9397-01 Auto Scaling
79 8501-9398-01 Dicom Scaling
80 8501-9424-01 Capability, C5-2 40R
81 8501-9450-01 Clin. Opt., Rad. CSI
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
l
l
ll
ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
Page 202


82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8501-9451-01
8501-9601-01
8501-9602-01
8501-9603-01
8501-9617-01
8501-9618-01
8501-9654-01
Clin. Opt., Vasc. CSI

3D Grayscale
Clin. Opt., OB THI
Clin. Opt., Abdominal THI
Tissue Harmonic Imaging
Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert/THI
Enhanced Memory
8501-9986-01 Capability, C8-5, ATL
150.23
151.09
Software Versions
Notes
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
ll
l
1. For research purposes only. Not a purchasable feature.
Backup Diags
Data
This option is useful for diagnosing difficult and intermittent problems. It saves the error
log, the results of the last Comprehensive Test, the user event log, and other diagnostic
information to a blank formatted optical disk for later analysis. Service personnel should
contact their respective ATL technical support for directions on managing and transfer of
the backup data prior to performing this procedure.
Refer to Core Dump Utilities on page 190 for a similar procedure, which allows you to
store data on the optical or hard drives, or both.
4730-0036-02
Page 203
To backup the diagnostic data to an optical disk:

Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Backup Diags Data. Press SELECT. The Backup Diags Data
option is highlighted.
3. Verify the blank formatted optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected =
notch closed).
4. Insert the blank disk into the optical drive. Refer to Formatting Disks on page 188 for
the formatting procedure.
5. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. The results are displayed as Completed:
PASS. The process takes approximately 20 seconds to complete.
NOTE
If a disk has not been inserted in the drive, a dialog box is displayed. The LED
on the optical drive is lit and the Start button changes to Stop while data is being
transferred, however, the Stop function has not been implemented.
6. Move the cursor to Eject in the lower left of the display. Press SELECT to remove the
disk from the drive.
7. Label the disk with the following information:
-
Service Order (S.O.) number
Machine ID number
Chassis ID number
Account name
Install date
FSE number or name
4730-0036-02
Page 204
8. Return the disk to ATL Bothell (TSG, mail stop 440) or follow your local service policy.
The information on the optical disk will be analyzed and the disk will be returned to
you.
Video Test
Patterns Utility
The Video Test Pattern Utility is used to isolate monitor, printer, and VCR video problems.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Video Test Patterns Utility. The option is highlighted.
3. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A note is displayed stating:
The test patterns will be displayed one at a time. Press the spacebar to view the next
pattern, 1 through 0 to view a specific pattern, or any other key to quit.
4. Move the cursor to OK. Press SELECT. A grayshade test pattern is displayed.
5. Use the spacebar to move through the individual test patterns, or refer to the test pattern numbers in Table 9-5, and press the appropriate number to obtain the desired
test pattern.
Table 9-5
Video Test Patterns
Test Pattern
Number
Description
1
2
3
Sixteen grayshade bars displayed vertically. White bars on left, black on

right
Eight color bars displayed vertically. White, yellow, light blue, green,
purple, red, dark blue, and black
Cross hatch pattern. Black background, with white grid
4730-0036-02
Table 9-5
Page 205
Troubleshooting: Remote Diagnostics
Video Test Patterns (Continued)
Test Pattern
Number
Description
4
Entire screen displays the letter y in every character position. White

letters on a black background
Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. Black

background with white pattern
Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. White
background with black pattern
White rectangle on black background
White screen
Flat black screen
Flat black screen with grid of white dots
6
7
8
9
0
Remote
Diagnostics
The HDI 3500 has a full suite of diagnostic capabilities that can be run by means of a
telephone modem connection. Contact your ATL technical support for more information.
4730-0036-02
10
Page 206
Disassembly: Card Cage PCBs and Modules
Disassembly
WARNING
Always turn power off, disconnect the main power cord from the wall outlet, and wait at
least 30 seconds before removing or installing any PCB, module, or component.
CAUTIONS
Always use correct ESD procedures. ESD damage is cumulative and may not be
noticeable at first. ESD symptoms may be first exhibited as a slight degradation of
performance or image quality.
Do not pull and reinsert PCBs or other modules while main circuit breaker is ON. To
reset PCBs, use the reset button provided on the card edge of many modules.
Card Cage
PCBs and
Modules
General procedure
1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord.
2. Remove covers as necessary to gain access to the part requiring replacement.
3. Loosen captive screws on those boards with shields, or loosen the retaining clips as
necessary.
CAUTION
Several modules require that adjacent modules be removed in order to provide ease of
removal or allow correct alignment. For example, remove the PIM, PCM, PSP1, and
PSP2 to correctly align the IIM module by hand to prevent misalignment of the PCB to
the centerplane.
4730-0036-02
Page 207
Disassembly: Monitor
To remove the IIM:

1. Remove the right side panel in addition to the rear panel.
2. Remove all cable connectors from both the IIM and PIM.
3. Remove modules immediately to the right to gain clearance (to slot A3B).
4. Remove the IIM.
To insert the IIM:
1. Remove both modules immediately to the right (to slot A3B).
2. Use your right hand to align the IIM with the card guides and to ensure the connectors
mate correctly with the centerplane.
CAUTION
Use caution when inserting the IIM into the centerplane. If connector pins are bent during
insertion of the IIM, damage to the IIM or centerplane may result.
3. Replace the PIM and PCM.
4. Tighten all fasteners to ensure proper EMI/RFI shielding.
Monitor
NOTE
Always place the monitor on its back to prevent damage to the locking tabs when
the monitor is not installed on the system. (Four plastic feet are on the back of
the monitor.)
To install the monitor:

2. Place the monitor on the system with the tabs inserted into the latching assemblies.
3. Slide the retaining levers forward to engage the locking tabs.
4730-0036-02

Page 208
Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch
4. Rotate the retaining levers out and up to secure the monitor. Use a tool inserted into
the center hole of the lever if necessary.
5. Connect the video/audio (monitor signal) cable and engage the slide lock.
6. Connect the power cord to the monitor and rotate the cable lock to secure the connector to the monitor.
To remove the monitor:
2. Remove the VCR.
3. Release the cable lock on the power cord connector on the lower rear of the monitor
by rotating it to the rear of the system.
4. Disconnect the power cord from the monitor.
5. Slide the locking plate on the video/audio (monitor signal) cable to the left.
6. Disconnect the video/audio cable connector from the monitor.
7. Rotate down and slide to the rear the retaining levers under each side of the monitor
to release the monitor tabs. Use a tool inserted into the center hole of the lever if necessary.
8. Lift the monitor up and off of the system.
Control Panel
PCBs,
Trackball, and
ON/STANDBY
Switch
To remove the Control Panel PCBs, trackball, or ON/STANDBY switch:

(Figure 10-1):
2. Use a small common screwdriver to push in the locking bar latch release on the left
rear of the upper user-interface assembly (step 1 in Figure 10-1).
3. Slide the lock bar to the right and remove it (step 2).
4730-0036-02

Page 209
Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch
4. Lift the top edge of the upper user-interface assembly and remove the assembly to
gain access to the UIM or the lower user-interface assembly and trackball (step 3).
5. Disconnect and remove components as necessary.
Push in with common screwdriver

2
Lift and remove
Figure 10-1
Control Panel Details
Slide, then remove
4730-0036-02
Internal OEMs
Page 210
Disassembly: Internal OEMs
To install an Internal OEM:

(Figure 10-3)
1. Lay two straps on a flat surface; place OEM device upside down on the straps.
2. Place OEM tray upside down on the OEM.
-
Center the OEM between the sides of the tray with the captive screw to the rear of
the OEM (see detail in Figure 10-2).
The front of the tray should slightly overhang the OEM.
4730-0036-02
Page 211
Disassembly: Internal OEMs
- REAR Screws
MIC
OEM tray
5600
890
Tabs
- FRONT Figure 10-2
OEM Orientation on OEM Tray

3. Pass the straps through the first slots outside of the OEM with the ring, velcro and
buckle, as shown in Figure 10-3.
4. Adjust the buckle as tight as possible. Then loosen the velcro, pull on both ends of the
strap until snug, and reattach the velcro. Repeat for the second strap.
5. Secure tray in OEM bay with tabs in slots.
4730-0036-02

Page 212
Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
Velcro tail
Buckle
Ring
Universal
OEM plate
Strap
OEM
See Figure 14-8

Figure 10-3
Internal OEM Installation
Scanhead
Select Module
Removal and
Installation
To remove the Scanhead Select Module:

2. Disconnect scanheads from the system.
3. Remove the system front cover.
4730-0036-02

Page 213
4. Starting with screw number 14, loosen the screws in the reverse sequence shown in
Figure 10-4.
5. Remove the Scanhead Select Module.
6. Visually inspect the module.
To install the Scanhead Select Module:
1. Align the Scanhead Select Module over the Channel boards and flush against the
system. Ensure the module connects with the Channel board connectors and is level
and square on the front of the system.
2. Hand tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 10-4.
3. Replace missing or damaged screws with part number 1563-0258-01.
CAUTION
Overtightening the screws may damage the Scanhead Select Module gasket and/or
metal shield, requiring replacement of the module.
4. Use a 7/64 Allen wrench to tighten the screws in the order shown. The base of the
screw heads should be flush with the Scanhead Select Module.
5. Connect the system power cord and turn on the system.
6. Reconnect scanheads and verify system operation.
7. Install the system front cover.
4730-0036-02

Page 214
CAUTION
12
CAUTION: Carefully align the S/HSEL Module

over the Channel Boards. Do not damage the
RF gasket.
14
13
11
2
4
1. Hand tighten screws (P/N

1563-0258-01) in the order shown.
2. Use a wrench to tighten the screws an
additional 1/4 turn in the order shown.
Figure 10-4
10
S/HSEL Installation Details
4730-0036-02

Page 215
Screw (4 plcs)
Metal jaws
See Figure 14-36

Figure 10-5
Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module)
4730-0036-02

Page 216
RFI gasket
Backing plate
Cable stripped
Bracket
Nuts (or screws)
See Figure 14-3

Figure 10-6
Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel)
4730-0036-02
11
Page 218
Cabling: Introduction
Cabling
Introduction
This section contains system card edge, cabling, and connector information. To aid in
navigating, figures have references to tables and table items to appropriate figures. Illustrations of the signal cables are grouped by system component or peripheral device. Use
the following rules to navigate through cabling:
When using electronic copies of this manual:

-
Locate cables using the system cabling diagrams in Figure 11-39 through
Figure 11-42. Part numbers on these diagrams are electronically linked to their
descriptions in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35.
Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and

Table 11-35. Together these tables list all the cables and have references to
Section 14, Parts, and to cable illustrations.
Find the physical location of cables in system illustrations of Section 14, Parts,
by using cross-references in the cable illustrations, or in Table 11-34 and
Table 11-35.
NOTE
Select the cross-reference in the first header of each table. Electronic cross-references in table headers that are continued (same header - next page), will not
respond when selected.
When using printed copies of this manual:

-
Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and

Table 11-35. Use figure references on the table to find illustrations and pinout
tables.
4730-0036-02
System
Cabling and
Connectors
Page 219
Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Locate cable part numbers using the system diagrams in Figure 11-39 through
Figure 11-42.
Figure 11-1 through Figure 11-4 are illustrations of the system primary connector assemblies.
Figure 11-5 shows the numbering pattern of the centerplane and PCB connectors. Also
shown is the general layout of PCBs, the general locations of test points, LEDs, and reset
and interrupt switches.
Figure 11-6 through Figure 11-38 are illustrations of system and OEM (internal and
external) signal and power cables. Pinout information for these cables are provided in
Table 11-1 through Table 11-33.
4730-0036-02
Page 220
Scanhead
connectors
Optical disk drive
ECG
High-level ECG
(from ECG monitors)
Static probe
connector
Pulse (Aux. Ch A)
Phono (Aux. Ch B)
Footswitch
See Figure 14-14

for Card Cage
Figure 11-1
DDEA
DDEA/A1F
Connector Locations, Front Panel
4730-0036-02
CONTROL
PANEL
MONITOR
VCR
HARDCOPY
Int. cable to user interface
Page 221
!
NI-RGB
Int. monitor
non-interlaced RGB
(IRGB in VCR playback)
Int. VCR S-VHS video
Int. hardcopy interlaced

RGB OSP. and monochrome video out
I-RGB out/in
S-VID
CVID
B&W VID
Ext. monitor non-interlaced RGB

(IRGB in VCR playback)
Ext. hardcopy interlaced RGB
Ext. S-VHS VCR video
Ext. composite video out/in
Ext. monochrome video out
DVS port
SCIP
E-NET
See Figure 14-21

for Card Cage
Figure 11-2
Int. Interface Module

IIM/A1B
Peripheral Interface Module

PIM/A2B
Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2)
4730-0036-02
Page 222
!
Ext. serial printer
10101 Serial
E-Net
See Figure 14-21

for Card Cage
Figure 11-3
9-pin serial connector

for laptop (P4)
Ethernet
System CPU
CPU/A6B
L
R
Ext. VCR
audio out
L
R
Ext. VCR
audio in
Adapter PCB
ADAPTR/A9B
Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2)
4730-0036-02
Page 223
P506
24 VDC to System Fans
P508
Secondary of Secondary
Transformer
P505
Power Out to Monitor
P507
Primary of Secondary
Transformer
P504
Power Out to OEM
P503
Power Out to OEM
P502
Main Transformer Primary
P501
Main Transformer Secondary
Figure 11-4
AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations
4730-0036-02
Page 224
Centerplane
Test points
A B
C
Reset SW
NMI SW
Stiffener
DSP LED
SCIP LED
MOP LED
95
Pin-plug on
centerplane
Phone jack
Receptacle
Bar code and part number
label area on solder side
Figure 11-5
PCB component side

(To left when facing card cage)
Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features
4730-0036-02
Signal Cables
Page 225
System and OEM (internal and external) signal cables are illustrated in Figure 11-6
through Figure 11-33. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-1
through Table 11-27.
2275-0267-XX
Molded strain relief
RCA male 3
black
RCA male 1
black
Connect one end of cable to ADAPTR
PCB Ext. VCR Audio (In and Out) and
the other end of the cable to Ext. SVHS
VCR Audio (Out and In)
RCA male 2
red
See Table 11-1
RCA male 4
red
Both ends of cable are cabled the same. Use

either end for either device.
Figure 11-6
RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)
Table 11-1
RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)
From ADAPTR PCB

Audio In/Out
To External VCR
Audio Out/In
Function
MALE 1 TIP
MALE 1 RING
MALE 2 TIP
MALE 2 RING
MALE 3 TIP
MALE 3 RING
MALE 4 TIP
MALE 4 RING
R-AUDIO
R-AUDIO GND
L-AUDIO
L-AUDIO GND
4730-0036-02
Page 226
2275-0326-XX
To OEM Video In
From PIM PCB NI- RGB
Red
P2
Pin 1
P1
Grn
P3
Blu
P4
Sync
P5
Pin 9
See Table 11-2

Figure 11-7
OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-2
Page 227
OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)
From PIM PCB
To OEM Video In
Connectors
Function
P1-1
P1-6
P1-2
P1-7
P1-3
P1-8
P1-4
P1-9
P2 CENTER
P2 SHIELD
P3 CENTER
P3 SHIELD
P4 CENTER
P4 SHIELD
P5 CENTER
P5 SHIELD
RED SIGNAL
RED_RETURN
GREEN SIGNAL
GREEN_RETURN
BLUE SIGNAL
BLUE_RETURN
SYNC SIGNAL
SYNC_RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 228
2275-0335-XX
Printer
Category 5 cable
P1
Pin 1
Pin 8
Ethernet Wall
Connector
J1
See Table 11-3
Figure 11-8
Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
Table 11-3
From Printer
To Ethernet Connector
Signal Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
To be added.
4730-0036-02
Table 11-3
Page 229
From Printer
To Ethernet Connector
P1-5
J1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
Signal Function
4730-0036-02
Page 230
2275-0337-XX
P4
From CPU PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
NC
9
3
2
6
5
4
8
7
1
P1
To laptop computer
P4 is the second connector from the top of the CPU PCB (9-pin Dsub, male).
Either end of the cable may be used on the HDI 5000 or the laptop connectors.
The only wires needed for communication between the HDI 5000 and a laptop computer are the TX, RX,
and GND wires.
See Table 11-4

Figure 11-9
Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-4
Page 231
Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)
From CPU
To Laptop
Signal Function (P4 on CPU)
P4-1 to P4-6
P4-2
P4-3
P4-4
P4-5
P4-6
P4-7
P4-8
P4-9
-
P1-3
P1-2
P1-6 to P1-1
P1-5
P1-4
P1-8
P1-7
CD
RX
TX
DTR
GND
DSRn
RTS
CTS
NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION
P1-9
4730-0036-02
Page 232
2275-0327-XX
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 37
Figure 11-10
See Table 11-5
Pin 9
AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input

(P/N 2275-0327-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-5
Page 233
AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input

(P/N 2275-0327-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-1
P1-20
P1-2
P1-21
P1-3
P1-22
P1-4
P1-23
P2-5
P2-4
P2-3
P2-4
P2-1
P2-2
P2-6
P2-2
RED SIGNAL
RED_RETURN
GREEN SIGNAL
GREEN_RETURN
BLUE SIGNAL
BLUE_RETURN
SYNC SIGNAL
SYNC_RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 234
2275-0395-XX
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 37
See Table 11-6
Pin 9
Figure 11-11
AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)
Table 11-6
AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-9
P1-10
P1-15
P1-5
P2-3
P2-8
P2-4
P2-9
Y-SIGNAL
Y-RETURN
C-SIGNAL
C-RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 235
2275-0394-XX
From PIM PCB IRGB
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
Pin 15
Figure 11-12
P2
See Table 11-7
Pin 9
AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-7
Page 236
AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)
From PIM (IRGB)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-1
P1-9
P1-2
P1-10
P1-3
P1-11
P1-4
P1-12
P2-5
P2-4
P2-3
P2-4
P2-1
P2-2
P2-6
P2-2
RED SIGNAL
RED RETURN
GREEN SIGNAL
GREEN RETURN
BLUE SIGNAL
BLUE RETURN
SYNC SIGNAL
SYNC RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 237
2275-0396-XX
From PIM PCB IRGB
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 15
See Table 11-8
Pin 9
Figure 11-13
AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)
Table 11-8
AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)
From PIM (IRGB)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-9
P1-10
P1-15
P1-5
P2-3
P2-8
P2-4
P2-9
Y-SIGNAL
Y-RETURN
C-SIGNAL
C-RETURN
4730-0036-02
3500-1404-XX
Page 238
See Table 11-9
Pin 25
To VCR
P2
From IIM PCB VCR

Pin 25
P1
Pin 1
P6
P8
P7
P4
Pin 1
Coaxial conductors (4X)
Figure 11-14
Shielded signal
conductors (5X)
P3
VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-9
Page 239
VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)
From IIM (VCR)
To VCR
Function
P1-1
P1-14
P1-2
P1-15
P1-9
P1-10
P1-12
P1-11
P1-3
P1-16
P1-4
P1-17
P1-5
P1-18
P1-6
P1-19
P1-7
P1-20
P1-8
P1-21
P3-3
P3-1 (Shield)
P3-4
P3-2 (Shield)
P2-2
P2-3
P2-7
P2-Shell
P4-3
P4-1 (Shield)
P4-4
P4-2 (Shield)
P7-Center
P7-Shield
P8-Center
P8-Shield
P6-Center
P6-Shield
P5-Center
P5-Shield
VCR_IN_Y
VCR_IN_Y return
VCR_IN_C
VCR_IN_C return
TX
RX
Return
Shield
VCR_OUT_Y
VCR_OUT_Y return
VCR_OUT_C
VCR_OUT_C return
IN_L
IN_L_RET
IN_R
IN_R_RET
OUT_L
OUT_L_RET
OUT_R
OUT_R_RET
4730-0036-02
Page 240
3500-2642-XX
From PIM PCB S-VID

Pin 9
P1
To VCR S-VIDEO input

J1
J2
To VCR S-VIDEO output
Pin 1
See Table 11-10
Figure 11-15
VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-10
Page 241
VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)
From PIM SVID
To J1/J2
Function
P1-1
P1-5
P1-2
P1-6
P1-3
P1-7
P1-4
P1-8
J1-3
J1-1
J1-4
J1-2
J2-3
J2-1
J2-4
J2-2
PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR
PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR_RETURN
PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR
PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR_RETURN
EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM
EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM_RETURN
EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM
EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM_RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 242
S1
DDEA PCB
3500-1483-XX
S3
To hard disk drive
S2
To optical
disk drive
See Table 11-11

All wires have corresponding pins on both plugs.
Figure 11-16
Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-11
Page 243
Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)
From DDEA
To Optical Drive
To Hard Drive
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-X
S1-49
S1-50
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-X
S2-49
S2-50
S3-1
S3-2
S3-3
S3-X
S3-49
S3-50
4730-0036-02
Page 244
3500-1539-XX
Coax
P2
P1
Shielded Cable
To MIC
(All Versions)
From IIM Hardcopy
Figure 11-17
See Table 11-12
Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-12
Page 245
Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
From IIM
To Aspect MIC
Function
P1-6
P1-25
P1-8
P1-12
P1-28
P1-29
P2-13
P2-23
P2-25
P2-12
P2-10
P2-22
VIDEO (coax)
VIDEO RETURN (coax shield)
PRINT (shielded cable)
READY (shielded cable)
RETURN (shielded cable)
SHIELD (shielded cable)
4730-0036-02
Page 246
3500-1540-XX
P1
Pin 1
To B/W video
printer
J1
J2
Pin 37
See Table 11-13
Figure 11-18
B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-13
Page 247
B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To B/W Video Printer
Function
P1-6
P1-25
P1-8
P1-13
P1-27
P1-28
J1 Center
J1 Shield
J2 Tip
J2 Ring
J2 Housing
J2 Shell
VIDEO
VIDEO_RETURN
PRINT
READY
RETURN
(Drain wire)
4730-0036-02
Page 248
3500-1541-XX
To RGB
printer

P1
J1 Red
Pin 1
J2 Grn
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 On-screen
programming
J6
Printer control
Pin 37
See Table 11-14
Figure 11-19
Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-14
Page 249
Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N

3500-1541-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To RGB Printer
Function
P1-1
P1-20
P1-2
P1-21
P1-3
P1-22
P1-4
P1-23
P1-5
P1-24
P1-8
P1-12
P1-27
P1-28
J1 Center
J1 Shield
J2 Center
J2 Shield
J3 Center
J3 Shield
J4 Center
J4 Shield
J5 Center
J5 Shield
J6 Tip
J6 Ring
J6 Housing
Shield (Drain)
RED (R)
RED_RETURN
GRN (G)
GRN_RETURN
BLU (B)
BLUE_RETURN
SNC (Sync)
SNC_RETURN
OSP (VIDEO OUT)
OSP_RETURN (VIDEO OUT RETURN)
(Shield connected to housing at J6)
4730-0036-02
Page 250
3500-2644-XX
To RGB printer
From PIM PCB I-RGB
J1 Red
Pin 15
J2 Grn
P1
Video in
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 Red
J6 Grn
Video out
J7 Blu
Pin 1
J8 Sync
See Table 11-15

Figure 11-20
Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N

3500-2644-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-15
Page 251
Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N

3500-2644-XX)
From PIM IRGB
To Coax Connectors
Function
P1-1
P1-9
P1-2
P1-10
P1-3
P1-11
P1-4
P1-12
P1-8
P1-13
P1-7
P1-14
P1-6
P1-15
P1-5
P1-15
J1 Center
J1 Shield
J2 Center
J2 Shield
J3 Center
J3 Shield
J4 Center
J4 Shield
J5 Center
J5 Shield
J6 Center
J6 Shield
J7 Center
J7 Shield
J8 Center
J8 Shield
PIM_RED_EXTHRDCPY
RED_OUT_RETURN
PIM_GRN_EXTHRDCPY
GRN_OUT_RETURN
PIM_BLUE_EXTHRDCPY
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
PIM_CSYNC_EXTHRDCPY
CSYNC_OUT_RETURN
EXTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
RED_IN_RETURN
EXTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
GRN_IN_RETURN
EXTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
EXTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
CSYNC_IN_RETURN
4730-0036-02
Page 252
3500-2641-XX
To Sony RGB printer
J1 Red
Pin 37
J2 Grn
J3 Blu
Video in
J4 Sync
P1
J5 Red
J6 Grn
J7 Blu
Video out
J8 Sync
Pin 1
J9 Printer control
See Table 11-16

Figure 11-21
Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX)
Table 11-16
From IIM HARDCOPY
To Coax Connectors Function
P1-1
P1-20
P1-2
P1-21
J1 Center
J1 Shield
J2 Center
J2 Shield
PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY
RED_OUT_RETURN
PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY
GRN_OUT_RETURN
4730-0036-02
Table 11-16
Page 253
From IIM HARDCOPY
To Coax Connectors Function
P1-3
P1-22
J3 Center
J3 Shield
PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
P1-4
P1-23
P1-14
P1-25
P1-15
P1-26
P1-16
P1-27
P1-17
P1-28
P1-8
P1-12
P1-29
P1-30
J4 Center
J4 Shield
J5 Center
J5 Shield
J6 Center
J6 Shield
J7 Center
J7 Shield
J8 Center
J8 Shield
J9 Tip
J9 Ring
J9 Housing
J9 Housing
PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY
CSYNC_OUT_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
RED_IN_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
GRN_IN_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
CSYNC_IN_RETURN
PIM_CNTRL_0_INTHRDCPY
INTHRDCPY_STATUS_0_PIM
GROUND
SHIELD
4730-0036-02
Page 254
3500-2643-XX
To Mitsubishi RGB printer
Pin 1
J1 Red
J2 Grn
P1
Video in
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 Red
J6 Grn
Video out
J7 Blu
Pin 37
J8 Sync
J9 Hardcopy control
(J9 is an 8-pin mini-DIN connector)
See Table 11-17

Figure 11-22
Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-17
Page 255
Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)
From IIM HARDCOPY

P1-1
P1-20
P1-2
P1-21
P1-3
P1-22
P1-4
P1-23
P1-14
P1-25
P1-15
P1-26
P1-16
P1-27
P1-17
P1-28
P1-8
P1-9
P1-12
P1-29
To Coax Connectors
J1 Center
J1 Shield
J2 Center
J2 Shield
J3 Center
J3 Shield
J4 Center
J4 Shield
J5 Center
J5 Shield
J6 Center
J6 Shield
J7 Center
J7 Shield
J8 Center
J8 Shield
J9-5
J9-2
J9-4
J9 Shield
Function
PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY
RED_OUT_RETURN
PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY
GRN_OUT_RETURN
PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY
CSYNC_OUT_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
RED_IN_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
GRN_IN_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
BLUE_OUT_RETURN
INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
CSYNC_IN_RETURN
PIM_CNTRL0_HRDCPY
PIM_CNTRL1_HRDCPY
HRDCPY_STATUS0_PIM
SHIELD
4730-0036-02
Page 256
3500-1835-XX
P2
P1
See Table 11-18
Figure 11-23
DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)
Table 11-18
DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)
From P1
To P2
Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P2-4
P2-5
P2-1
Tip Shunt
Tip Spring
Sleeve
4730-0036-02
Page 257
3500-2614-XX
P2
Left speaker + Blk
P3
Left speaker - Wht
P4
+12 V Blk
P5
P1
Lamp drive Wht

P6
Right speaker + Blk
P7
Right speaker - Wht
See Table 11-19

Figure 11-24
Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-19
Page 258
Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
+12 V (black)
Left Speaker+ (black)
Left Speaker- (white)
Ground (not used)
Right Speaker+ (black)
Right Speaker- (white)
Lamp Drive (white)
4730-0036-02
Page 259
3500-2632-XX
RED
P1
WHITE
PCB
See Table 11-20
Figure 11-25
Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)
Table 11-20
Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)
From P1(Plug)
To PCB
Function
Ring
Tip
Shield
Red
White
No connection
Audio
Audio Return
Ground
4730-0036-02
Page 260
3500-2633-XX
From IIM PCB MONITOR

Pin 1
To monitor
P2
P1
Pin 25
Pin 37
Sliding latch
Pin 1
See Table 11-21

Figure 11-26
Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-21
Page 261
Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)
From IIM (MONITOR)
To Monitor
Function
P2-1
P2-20
P2-2
P2-21
P2-14
P2-11
P2-30
P2-12
P2-33
P2-15
P2-17
P2-35
P2-18
P2-36
P2-19
P2-37
P1-10
P1-9
P1-22
P1-21
P1-11
P1-13
P1-12
P1-17
P1-4
P1-16
P1-3
P1-15
P1-2
P1-14
P1-1
GND
L_SPKR
GND
R_SPKR
AUDIO SHIELD
MICR+
MICRMICR_SHIELD
CSYNC_INTMON
GND
BLUE_INTMON
BLUE_INTMON_REF
GREEN_INTMON
GREEN_INTMON_REF
RED_INTMON
RED_INTMON_REF
4730-0036-02
Page 262
2275-0393-XX
LED
Panel lens
Panel connector
Panel
2-wire cable assembly

(No pin-out table)
Header connector
Cable assembly is located in the monitor. The LED is positioned above the
monitor controls and may be seen through holes in the monitor cover.
Figure 11-27
LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX)
4730-0036-02
Page 263
3500-2639-XX
To ON/STANDBY switch
To UIM PCB ON/STANDBY
Rear connector (Black)

P1
1
2
3
Center connector (Red)
Unconnected
See Table 11-22

Figure 11-28
On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)
Table 11-22
On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)
From UIM PCB
To ON/STANDBY Switch
Spade Lugs
Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
Spade Lug (Black wire)

Spade Lug (Red wire)
Drain - No Connection (Gnd)
GROUND
IIM_P2-8
GROUND
4730-0036-02
Page 264
3500-2741-XX
From P3 UIM PCB
To Command Module
Pin 9
Pin 9
P3
P2
Pin 1
Pin 1
See Table 11-23
Figure 11-29
Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-23
Page 265
Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)
From P3 UIM
To P2 Command Module
Function
P3-9
P3-8
P3-7
P3-6
P3-5
P3-4
P3-3
P3-2
P3-1
P2-9
P2-8
P2-7
P2-6
P2-5
P2-4
P2-3
P2-2
P2-1
+5 VOLT
+5 VOLT
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND (Not used)
RMOTE_DATA_UIF
PIM_CLOCK_UIF
PIM_STROBE_UIF
UIF_DATA_RMOTE
4730-0036-02
Page 266
3500-2752-XX
Blk
Shield
PCB
P1
Red
See Table 11-24

Figure 11-30
Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N

3500-2752-XX)
Table 11-24
Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N

3500-2752-XX)
From P1
To PCB
Function
P1-3
P1-2
P1-1
RED
BLACK
SHIELD
MIC+
MICSHIELD
4730-0036-02
Page 267
3500-2770-XX
To UIM PCB
Pin 1
To lower user interface

J1
P1
Pin 68
Front View
(Both connector
ends)
See Table 11-25
Figure 11-31
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N

3500-2770-XX)
Table 11-25

3500-2770-XX)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
P1-5
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
L_SENSE_12
L_SENSE_11
L_SENSE_09
L_SENSE_04
L_SENSE_07
4730-0036-02
Table 11-25
Page 268

3500-2770-XX) (Continued)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
P1-11
P1-12
P1-13
P1-14
P1-15
P1-16
P1-17
P1-18
P1-19
P1-20
P1-21
P1-22
P1-23
P1-24
P1-25
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-9
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
J1-13
J1-14
J1-15
J1-16
J1-17
J1-18
J1-19
J1-20
J1-21
J1-22
J1-23
J1-24
J1-25
L_SENSE_06
L_SENSE_00
L_SENSE_01
L_SENSE_03
TB_YA
TB_XB
TB_XA
L_LED_1
L_SENSE_15
L_SCAN_5
L_SCAN_3
L_SCAN_0
L_SCAN_2
L_SCAN_6
L_SENSE_14
L_LED_2
DA_4
DA_5
DCS1n
DCS2n
4730-0036-02
Table 11-25
Page 269

From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-26
P1-27
P1-28
P1-29
P1-30
P1-31
P1-32
P1-33
P1-34
P1-35
P1-36
P1-37
P1-38
P1-39
P1-40
P1-41
P1-42
P1-43
P1-44
P1-45
J1-26
J1-27
J1-28
J1-29
J1-30
J1-31
J1-32
J1-33
J1-34
J1-35
J1-36
J1-37
J1-38
J1-39
J1-40
J1-41
J1-42
J1-43
J1-44
J1-45
DCS4n
AND_CLK
DD_1
DD_2
DD_4
DD_5
DA_0
DD_7
DA_1
L_SENSE_10
GROUND
L_SENSE_08
GROUND
L_SENSE_05
GROUND
L_SENSE_02
GROUND
TB_YB
-12 VOLT
L_LED_3
4730-0036-02
Table 11-25
Page 270

From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-46
P1-47
P1-48
P1-49
P1-50
P1-51
P1-52
P1-53
P1-54
P1-55
P1-56
P1-57
P1-58
P1-59
P1-60
P1-61
P1-62
P1-63
P1-64
P1-65
J1-46
J1-47
J1-48
J1-49
J1-50
J1-51
J1-52
J1-53
J1-54
J1-55
J1-56
J1-57
J1-58
J1-59
J1-60
J1-61
J1-62
J1-63
J1-64
J1-65
-12 VOLT
L_SENSE_13
L_SCAN_7
L_SCAN_1
+5 VOLT
L_SCAN_4
+5 VOLT
L_LED_8
+5 VOLT
DA_3
+5 VOLT
DCS0n
+5 VOLT
DCS3n
+5 VOLT
DD_0
GROUND
DD_3
GROUND
DD_6
4730-0036-02
Table 11-25
Page 271

From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-66
P1-67
P1-68
J1-66
J1-67
J1-68
GROUND
DA_2
GROUND
3500-2771-XX
Pin 25
To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL
To P2 UIM PCB
J1
P1
Pin 1
See Table 11-26
Figure 11-32
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-26
Page 272
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)
To P2 UIM PCB
Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
P1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
P1-11
P1-12
P1-13
P1-14
P1-15
P1-16
P1-17
P1-18
P1-19
P1-20
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-9
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
J1-13
J1-14
J1-15
J1-16
J1-17
J1-18
J1-19
J1-20
+5 VOLT
+5 VOLT
+5 VOLT
+5 VOLT
+12 VOLT
-12 VOLT
No Connection
ON/STANDBY SWITCH-2
No Connection
No Connection
GROUND
PIM_CLOCK_UIF
PIM_DATA_UIF
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
SPEAKER LS1
4730-0036-02
Table 11-26
Page 273
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) (Continued)
To P2 UIM PCB
Function
P1-21
P1-22
J1-21
J1-22
GROUND
No Connection
P1-23
P1-24
P1-25
J1-23
J1-24
J1-25
No Connection
PIM_STROBE_UIF
UIF_DATA_PIM
4730-0036-02
Page 274
3500-2772-XX
From cable 3500-2633-XX
To ISEM Video In
(IIM MONITOR)
P1-1
P1-2
Pin 37
Pin 25
Pin 1
Pin 1
To cable 3500-2633-XX
(Monitor)
From ISEM Video Out

P2-2
P2-1
Pin 37
Pin 37
Pin 1
Pin 1
See Table 11-27, Table 11-28, and Table 11-29

Figure 11-33
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-27
Page 275
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 IIM MONITOR
To P1-2 ISEM Video In
Function
14
1
15
2
16
3
17
4
21
22
9
10
4
11
13
12
14
1
15
2
16
3
17
4
21
22
9
10
4
11
13
12
RED_VIDEO
RED_RETURN
GREEN_VIDEO
GREEN_RETURN
BLUE_VIDEO
BLUE_RETURN
COMPOSITE_SYNC
SYNC_RETURN
RIGHT_SPEAKER+
RIGHT_SPEAKERLEFT_SPEAKER+
LEFT_SPEAKERGROUND
UPHONE+
UPHONEUPHONE_SHIELD
4730-0036-02
Table 11-28
Page 276
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P2-1 Monitor
To P2-2 ISEM Video Out
Function
19
37
18
36
17
35
33
15
21
2
20
1
3
11
30
12
19
37
18
36
17
35
33
15
21
2
20
1
3
11
30
12
RED_VIDEO
RED_RETURN
GREEN_VIDEO
GREEN_RETURN
BLUE_VIDEO
BLUE_RETURN
COMPOSITE_SYNC
SYNC_RETURN
RIGHT_SPEAKER+
RIGHT_SPEAKERLEFT_SPEAKER+
LEFT_SPEAKERGROUND
UPHONE+
UPHONEUPHONE_SHIELD
4730-0036-02
Table 11-29
Page 277
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 Pin
To P2-1 Pin
Function
5
8
24
6
NO CONNECTION
19
18
20
7
6
5
4
25 CONNECT P2-1 PIN 6
8
27
9
+12 VOLT
GROUND
-12 VOLT
+5 VOLT
GROUND
SCL
SDA
GROUND
4730-0036-02
Power Cables
Page 278
System and OEM (internal and external) power cables are illustrated in Figure 11-34
through Figure 11-38. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-30
through Table 11-33.
3500-1482-XX
To hard disk drive

Pin 1
P3
P1
From DDEA PCB

1
To optical disk drive

Pin 1
P2
Table 11-30
Figure 11-34
Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-30
Page 279
Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)
From DDEA PCB
To Optical Drive
To Hard Drive
Function
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
P1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P2-1
P2-4
P2-2
P2-3
-
P3-1
P3-4
P3-2
P3-3
+12 Vdc
+ 5 Vdc
+ 12 Vdc
+ 5 Vdc
+ 12 Vdc Return
+ 5 Vdc Return
+ 12 Vdc Return
+ 5 Vdc Return
4730-0036-02
Page 280
3500-1514-XX
(+)Red
(-)Blk
1
2
22 f 50 V capacitor
24 V (+) Red
(+)Red
(-)Blk
To ACIM
P506
(+)Red
(-)Blk
(+)Red
(-)Blk
(-)Blk
(Flat side)
Pin 1 (Red)
All Black and Red wire pairs go to individual fans.
Figure 11-35
Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX)
4730-0036-02
Page 281
3500-2616-XX
To ACIM P505
Blue
Monitor power
115 VOLTS
Brown
3500-2616-XX
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
Grn/Yel
Shield
See Table 11-31
Figure 11-36
Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)
Table 11-31
Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)
From P505 on ACIM
To Monitor Power
Connector
Function
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
GND from ACIM (Green/Yellow)

Neutral (Blue)
Line Voltage (Brown) 115V
4730-0036-02
Page 282
3500-1517-XX - AAM
1
3500-1873-XX - MIC or color printer
3500-2780-XX - VCR
To 3500-1578 ACIM:
Hardcopy - P503
VCR - P504
4
3
2
1
Blue wire (neutral)

To AAM, MIC, color printer,
or VCR
3
115 Volts
3
2
(OEM)
2
1
Brown wire (line)

Green wire (ground)
Shield wire
Figure 11-37
Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary.
See Table 11-32
OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal
4730-0036-02
Table 11-32
Page 283
From P503/P504 on
ACIM
To OEM Power
Connectors
Function
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3

Neutral (Blue)
Line Voltage (Brown) 115 V
4730-0036-02
3500-1547-XX - Hardcopy
3500-2397-XX - MIC
3500-2781-XX - VCR
Page 284
To 3500-1579/1580 ACIM:
Hardcopy - P503
VCR - P504
4
3
2
1
Blue wire (neutral)

To VCR, MIC,
or hardcopy
1
4
2
230 Volts
4
2
(OEM)
Brown wire (line)

Green wire (ground)
Shield wire
Figure 11-38
Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary.
See Table 11-33
4730-0036-02
Table 11-33
Page 285
From P503/P504 on
ACIM
To OEM Power
Connectors
Function
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 4
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 4

Neutral (Blue)
Line Voltage (Brown) 230V
4730-0036-02
Page 286
Monitor Internal
Cabling
Monitor internal cabling is illustrated in Figure 11-39.
System
Interconnect
Cabling
Notes for the system interconnect cabling diagrams are provided in Figure 11-40. System signal interconnect and power distribution cabling are illustrated in Figure 11-41 and
Figure 11-42. Signal Interconnect cables are listed in Table 11-34 and power cables are
listed in Table 11-35.
NOTE
Some of the cables within the video monitor assembly are field replaceable, and
some are not. Cables within the OEM monitor assembly (P/N 2100-1346-XX)
are not field replaceable. If one of the cables in the OEM monitor assembly is
bad, order the video monitor assembly (P/N 3500-2532-XX). Refer to
Figure 11-39 to determine which cables are included with the OEM monitor
assembly.
4730-0036-02
Page 287
Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
Cable Part
Numbers
Table 11-34
Part Number
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables

Part Description
(See Figure 11-41 for the System Cabling and for
peripheral part numbers)
2275-0327-01
2275-0394-01
2275-0395-01
2275-0396-01
3500-1540-04
3500-2741-01
Cable Assy, AAM Input, Internal

Cable Assy, AAM Input, Ext, Level 10
Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Int, Level 10
Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Ext, Level 10
Cable Assy, B&W Video Printer
Cable Assy, Command Module Cover to P3 Remote
Control UIM
2275-0335-01
3500-1541-04
3500-2644-01
3500-1835-01
Cable Assy, Codonics Printer, NP1660

Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, Internal
Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, External RGB
Cable Assy, DDEA, Physio, Jack,
3500-1483-03
Cable Assy, Disk Drive Signal, DDEA
3500-1851-01
Cable Assy, Disk Drive, Signal, No MO
Notes/Reference
See Figure 11-10
See Figure 11-12
See Figure 11-11
See Figure 11-13
See Figure 11-18
See Figure 11-29,
and Figure 14-33
and Figure 14-37
See Figure 11-8
See Figure 11-19
See Figure 11-20
See Figure 11-23,
and Figure 14-16
and Figure 14-17
See Figure 11-16
and Figure 14-19
See Figure 14-20
4730-0036-02
Table 11-34
Page 288
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Number
Part Description
4500-5512-01
2275-0326-01
3500-2642-01
3500-2771-01
Cable Assy, External Disk Drive Test

Cable Assy, External OEM
Cable Assy, External SVHS VCR
Cable Assy, IIM to P2 UIM
3500-2772-01
3500-2770-01
Cable Assy, ISEM Adapter

Cable Assy, J1 LCP to P1 UIM
2275-0393-01
Cable Assy, LED, 3 mm Conn, 8-inch L
3500-2632-02
3500-2752-01
Cable Assy, Microphone

Cable Assy, Microphone, Internal, Monitor
3500-2643-01
3500-2614-02
Cable Assy, Mitsubishi RGB, Video Printer

Cable Assy, Monitor, Lower Bezel
Notes/Reference
See Figure 11-15

See Figure 11-32,
and Figure 14-33
See Figure 11-33
See Figure 11-31,
and Figure 14-33
See Figure 11-27,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-26
See Figure 14-28
See Figure 11-30,
and Figure 11-25,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-26
See Figure 11-22
See Figure 11-24,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-26,
and Figure 14-27
4730-0036-02
Table 11-34
Page 289
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Number
Part Description
3500-2613-01
3500-2633-02
Cable Assy, Monitor, Upper Bezel

Cable Assy, Monitor to System , 64-inch
3500-1539-03
3500-2639-01
Cable Assy, Multi-Image Camera (MIC), Aspect

Cable Assy, On/Standby Switch
2275-0326-01
2275-0337-01
3500-2641-02
3500-1404-06
2275-0176
2275-0267-01
Cable Assy, OEM, NI-RGB External

Cable Assy, Serial Data
Cable Assy, Sony RGB, Video Printer
Cable Assy, VCR, Internal
Cable, BNC, M/M, GFT, RG 59B/U, 750HM
Cable, RCA-RCA, Stereo, Molded, GFT
Notes/Reference
See Figure 14-26
See Figure 11-26,
and Figure 11-39
See Figure 11-17
See Figure 11-28,
and Figure 14-33
and Figure 14-34
See Figure 11-7
See Figure 11-9
See Figure 11-21
See Figure 11-14
Not Illustrated
See Figure 11-6
4730-0036-02
Table 11-35
Page 290
HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables
Part Number
Part Description
(See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram
and for OEM/peripheral part numbers)
3500-1873-02
3500-2397-03
3500-1482-03
Cable Assy, 100-120 VAC, Dual Hardcopy

Cable Assy, 230 VAC, Dual Hardcopy
Cable Assy, Disk Drive Power, DDEA
3500-1514-03
Cable Assy, Fan, 24 VDC
3500-1517-05
3500-1516-05
3500-2780-01
3500-1547-05
3500-2781-01
3500-2616-01
2275-0373-01
3500-0386-01
Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, Hardcopy

Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR
Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR, HDI 5000
Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, Hardcopy
Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, VCR, HDI 5000
Cable Assy, Power Monitor, Electrohome
Cord, PC Adapter, 10A/125 V, 12-inch
Power Cord Assy, 96-inch, 16-Guage
Notes/Reference
See Figure 11-37
See Figure 11-38
See Figure 11-34,
and Figure 14-15
and Figure 14-16
and Figure 14-20
See Figure 11-35,
and Figure 14-11
See Figure 11-37
See Figure 11-37
See Figure 11-37
See Figure 11-38
See Figure 11-38
See Figure 11-25
Not Illustrated
Not Illustrated
4730-0036-02
Table 11-35
Part Number
2275-0324-01
2275-0388-01
2265-0056-02
2275-0391-01
Page 291
HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables (Continued)

Part Description
(See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram
and for OEM/peripheral part numbers)
Notes/Reference
Power Cord, Harmonized, CEE-22 & 7
See Figure 14-21
Power Cord, Unshld, Hosp Plug
See Figure 14-21
4730-0036-02
Page 292
Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
HOT
Line
AC
power
OEM monitor
2100-1346-XX
HOT
Microphone assembly
P1
NEUTRAL
INT_MIC+
3
2
NEUTRAL
GROUND
MIC
INT_MIC-
GROUND
3500-2631-02
3500-2752-01
14
1
15
UIF_LIGHT_CONTROL
RED_SHIELD
LED_DRIVE
SWITCH_SENSE_UP
From
system
signal
connector
Cable P/N
3500-2633-02
17
4
19
18
21
22
9
10
SWITCH_SENSE_DOWN
BLUE_IN
+5 V
SYNC_IN
5
24
20
8
4
3
GND
SYNC_SHIELD
LED+
10
BLUE_SHIELD
GND
SLC
LED
2
LED_DRIVE
Monitor
control panel
PCB assembly
2275-0393-01
P3
7500-1312-XX
5
6
RIGHT_SPEAKER+
RIGHT_SPEAKER-
LEFT_SPEAKER+
LEFT_SPEAKER-
+
-
Right
speaker
+
-
Left
speaker
SDA
P2
RIGHT_SPEAKER+
RIGHT_SPEAKER-
2
3
10
LEFT_SPEAKER+
LEFT_SPEAKER-
7
MIC+
MIC-
11
13
12
1
9
GREEN_IN
GREEN_SHIELD
16
P4
P5
RED_IN
MIC_SHIELD
MIC_SHIELD
+12 V
Light bar PCB assembly
14
15
Bulb 3900-0032-01 (8 plcs)
13
4
-12 V
GND
GND
1
7
-12 V
LAMP_DRV
7500-1313-XX (PCB)
3500-2614-02
Note: There are no field-replaceable parts

within the OEM monitor assembly.
MONDIAGRAM 10/16/00
Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram
Page 293
4730-0036-02
2275-0327-XX and 2275-0394-XX = Internal installation

2275-0395-XX and 2275-0396-XX = External installation
Do not connect external printer to printer connector on PIM PCB.
Part number 4500-5512-01 is an external disk drive test cable.
To obtain video loop-through when the ISEM is installed, video is routed from the monitor
connector on the IIM PCB to the ISEM Video In and out the ISEM Video Out connector to
the monitor. (Two 3500-2633-XX cables are required.)
When the ISEM is not installed, only one 3500-2633-XX is required.
Mitsubishi printer only.
Connect this end to P503 or P504 for UP5600 printer installation.
If a UP5600 is installed, disconnect the main transformer connector to P501 on the ACIM.
Connect the UP5600 as shown.
ON/STANDBY switch controls system logic voltage to turn untrasound system ON & OFF.
Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram
4730-0036-02
Page 294
3500-2771-01
Microphone
3500-2632-02
3500-2639-01
3500-2752-01
P1
2275-0326-01
On/Standby switch
J1
P2
Internal cable
3500-2741-01
3500-2614-02
P3
User
Interface
Module
P1
3500-2770-01
System
monitor
Speakers
Remote control port
External monitor
3500-2633-02
3500-2633-02
Centerplane PCB
PIM/A2B
DDEA/A1F
IIM/A1B
J1
3500-2644-01
Ext. serial
printer
3500-1483-03
NI-RGB
Lower User Interface
Monitor
I-RGB
3500-2642-01
P4
S-VID
VCR
Video
switch
CVID out
3500-2772-01
Keyboard
Hand
controller
Keyboard
SYNC
IN
SYNC
OUT
RED
IN
RED
OUT
GRN
IN
GRN
OUT
BLUE
IN
Pulse
B&W VID
Ext.
printer
Footswitch
SCIP
E-Net
4500-5512-01
External
3500-2644-01
BLUE
OUT
3500-1540-04
3500-2643-01
2
Printer
External
3500-1404-06
Hardcopy device
3500-1540-04
2275-0327-01
2275-0394-01 (Ext. install)
3500-2642-01
B/W video printer
2275-0267-01
3500-2641-02
Footswitch
External SVHS VCR

Video out
Access Acquisition Module
Panasonic VCR MD830
2275-0267-01
3500-2644-01 (Int. install)
AAM control
panel
E-Net
Hardcopy
Hard
drive
3500-2641-02
Video in
Ext. VCR
audio in
Phono
2275-0176
10101 serial
CVID in
Video Video
in
out
ISEM
Ext. VCR
audio out
ECG
Trackball
CPU/A6B
ADAPTR/A9B
Control
Panel
Optical drive
Trackball
3500-2633-02
3500-1539-03
References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40
2275-0395-01
2275-0396-01
Multi-image camera
Mitsubishi Color Printer
Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram
5000SIGDIAG 10/13/00
Page 295
4730-0036-02
3500-2639-01
System
monitor
On/Standby switch
J1
P1
AC in
P3
User
Interface
Module
Fans
3500-1514-03
3500-2616-01
P2
Centerplane PCB
ACIM/PS4
DDEA/A1F
+24 VDC
P506
Optical drive
3500-1482-03
Lower User Interface
3500-2780-01, 120V
3500-2781-01, 240V
P505
P507
P504
P503
ECG
P508
P502
Pulse
Phono
ISEM
P501
Footswitch
Hard
drive
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz

3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz

3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz

3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
Access Acquisition Module
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz

3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1517-05, 120V
6
3500-1547-05
240V, CP50E
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz

3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
Mitsubishi Color Printer
3500-1873-02
120V 60Hz
3500-2397-03
240V 50Hz
Main
transformer
OEM
transformer
Sony Color Printer UP5600
Panasonic VCR
MD830
Cables are part of

transformer
26010052XX
Cables are part of

transformer
26010058XX
References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40
Multi-image camera
B/W video printer
Hardcopy device
Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram
5000PWRDIAG 3/30/98
4730-0036-02
12
Page 296
Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
Change History
This section lists the software and hardware changes associated with a specific software
release number. Unless noted under the Hardware Changes paragraph, the hardware
changes are not required for that particular software release.
The part numbers listed after the software versions are the optical disk part numbers for
that software version.
150.XX
Software
Releases
Features
Supported
Broadband Linear Array Scanheads
L7-4 40 mm
LAP L9-5 (laparoscopic)
L10-5 38 mm
CL10-5 (compact linear)
L12-5 38 mm
L12-5 50 mm
Broadband Curved Array
C3.5 76 mm
C4-2 40 mm
C5-2 40R
4730-0036-02
C5 IVT 11 mm (intravaginal)
C7-4 40 mm
C9-5 ICT 8 mm (intracavity)
C8-4v
CT8-4
C8-5 14R
Page 297
Broadband Phased Array
P3-2 20 mm
P4-2 20 mm
P5-3
P7-4
MPT 7-4 (multi-plane transesophageal)
BPT 9-5 (biplane transesophageal)
Doppler Transducers
TCD Static D2 TC
D2 CW
D5 CW
D10 CW
Miscellaneous Features
3D Grayscale
Tissue Harmonic Imaging
4730-0036-02
Features Not
Supported
150.23 (8.5.1
build level)
Page 298
High Q Cardiac Output/Volume Flow
DiskLink/NetLink short loops
VCR controls on the control panel
Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)
Modality Worklist
Sono CT
Intelligent Frame Rate Accelerator
DVS
The following UpLink functions

-
Some low-level diagnostic tests are not implemented
Image transfer capability is intermittent
PCM flash reload is not functional
Initial release 4252-0831-06 on July 2, 1999.
New Features
Refer to Features Supported in software version 150.XX.
Problems Corrected
Not applicable.
Known Problems
Refer to Operating Notes:
4707-0036-02
English
4777-0036-02
German
4730-0036-02
Page 299
4787-0036-02
French
4797-0036-02
Spanish
4807-0036-02
Dutch
4817-0036-02
Swedish
4827-0036-02
Italian
4837-0036-02
Finnish
4847-0036-02
Brazilian
4877-0036-02
Portuguese
4887-0036-02
Danish
4907-0036-02
Greek
Hardware Changes
There are no hardware changes.
150.24 (8.5.2
build level)
Released 4252-0831-07 on February 18, 2000.
New Features
None.
Problems Corrected
Software version 150.24 deletes obsolete UART tests from the FEC and ADAPTR PCB,
tests in the Machine Comprehensive Test. New versions of the FEC PCB (P/N
7500-1526-XX) and ADAPTR PCB (P/N 7500-1328-XX) do not have the obsolete UART,
which caused failure of the Comprehensive Test.
4730-0036-02
Page 300
Known Problems
Refer to Operating Notes:
4707-0036-03
English
4777-0036-03
German
4787-0036-03
French
4797-0036-03
Spanish
4807-0036-03
Dutch
4817-0036-03
Swedish
4827-0036-03
Italian
4837-0036-03
Finnish
4847-0036-03
Brazilian
4877-0036-03
Portuguese
4887-0036-03
Danish
4907-0036-03
Greek
Hardware Changes
There are no hardware changes required for this software version, however, the FEC and
ADAPTR were changed to delete obsolete UART tests. Software revision 150.24 supports those changes. See Problems Corrected on page 298.
151.06 (8.5.3
build level)
Released SW P/N 4252-0886-06 on June 07, 2000.

Field upgrade SW P/N 4252-0896-05
4730-0036-02
Page 301
New Features
All features of the previous software version (150.24 software). There are no new features released with this software version.
Problems Corrected
Corrects an intermittent problem that prevents the Doppler spectral trace from updating when the sample volume cursor is moved.
Improves system response to the Freeze control. Also improves system response
times due to TGC slidepot or other control activation during periods of high PCM
activity.
Corrects an issue with the OB graph causing current measurement values to not be
displayed in the year 2000.
Adds a low-level optical disk format option to the user diagnostics menu. Performing a
low-level optical disk format enables faster disk operation.
Allows the user to perform a CW exam using the D2CW probe when the BPT9-5
scanhead is connected. Previously, there was no Doppler signal when this was
attempted.
Prevents the system from hanging after deleting all images from the hard disk if one
of the images is not readable. Unreadable images may result from turning off the system before the image has been fully saved to disk, a hard disk error, or a power supply problem.
Corrects a DiskLink issue with the patient exam directory showing patient exams as
being sent to the optical disk when they are not.

Hdi-3500 Manual Service

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Hdi-3500 Manual Service

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Printed in USA

All rights reserved

HDI 3500 Service Manual

This manual supports the field service maintenance and repair of

The following conventions are used in this manual:

All procedures are numbered. You must complete steps in the

Bulleted lists indicate general information about a function or

Control names are spelled and capitalized in the manual as

Menu items or titles appearing on the display are spelled and

Scanheads and pencil or static probes are referred to as

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Technical Publications, MS 264, at the address below

HDI 3500 Service Manual

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 5-2 System Crate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HDI 3500 Service Manual

To perform an electrical inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

M-mode Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 9-4 Machine Options/Software Build

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Figure 10-5 Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 11-18 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 11-29 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Replacement Code Legend (All Matrices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 13-24 A6B CPU PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 13-43 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Figure 14-10 Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Figure 14-33 Command Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Table 15-6 CW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Lower user interface

Optical disk drive

Card cage and

HDI 3500 System (Front)

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 System (Rear)

The following scanhead types are supported:

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Compact linear array

Static TCD probes

Bi-plane and multi-plane transesophageal

HDI 3500 Service Manual

HDI 3500 Service Manual

Class I equipment with Type B, BF, and CF applied parts